Home

GT11 User's Manual

1. 16 p 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 0 63 E 7 c m amp 0 28 E gt 5 E x a i m z B lt m26 M2 6 gt GT01 C O00 R4 25P 16 50 1 97 L 53 2 09 16 0 63 0 63 oe 7 o ex j 0 28 gt x g iB i i M2 6 M26 F Value of OOO Length L mm inch 100 10000 393 7 200 20000 787 4 300 30000 1181 1 GT01 C O00 R4 8P 16 50 1 97 L 40 1 58 J o13 es 25x 33 0 52 sH pe _ 40 99 1 3 3 3 Ho ooo 0 24 3 Mes Higi f 9 O pi q lt M2 6 Value of OOO Length L mm inch 10 1000 39 37 30 3000 118 11 100 10000 393 7 200 20000 787 4 300 30000 1181 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 5 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES GT01 C30R2 25P 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 16 1 k 0 63 35 1 38 nnnnnnnn Yy on TTT eer eesle owes Bla lt 4 40UNC M2 6 gt GT01 C30R2 9S 16 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 0 1 97 ia O g L lt 4 40UNC 4 40UNC gt 35 1 38 0 35 1 38 GT01 C30R2 6P 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 40 1 58 413 a 620x28 0 52 z E b7 _ 0 79 1 1 o 0 28
2. a a 2 00000 00000 Faq SP a Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions W fa bed ol pite T S 1 S Sls ca En SS 5 z E oO N ams m SS 5 4 40UNC a Inch screw type Sy i S ca D Ea T g ii gt E a Panel board thickness to be 5 mm 0 2 or less App 3 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES External dimensions of memory board k 37 0 1 46 j lt 8 1 0 25 Unit mm inch I ae E E CD is ID External dimensions of stand GT05 50STAND 20 0 0 79 For angle of 75 A 5 o LO N y k 260 10 24 A 220 8 67 gt Unit mm inch A9GT 50STAND For angle of 75 o A Lo E gt ps O ae S rt 1O N O CO y J 156 6 15 p 262 10 32 l 220 8 67 l Unit mm inch App 4 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of communication cable GT01 C30R4 25P Unit mm inch
3. FG i Q i BATTERY CI TI A m i s 24VDC Class D grounding power supply A A class 3 grounding 7 2 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Make sure to carry out the followings for grounding e Carry out the independent grounding if possible e If the independent grounding is impossible carry out the shared grounding as shown in fig 2 below Other device OVERVIEW Grounding Grounding 1002 or less 100 or less 1 Independent ground 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding are Best condition Good condition Not allowed Use the cable of 2mm or more for grounding Set the grounding point closer to the GOT to make the grounding cable short as possible CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Recommended terminal shape Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless screw terminal screw terminal 03 2 sam TOT gw foi 03 2 ie lE When wiring one cable to When wiring two cables to one terminal one terminal SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME Cable size For power supply 0 75mm min For grounding 2mm min Solderless terminal M3 solderless terminal applicable solderless terminal RAV 1 25 3 V2 N3A and FV2 N3A Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 8N m 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy EMC DIRECTIVE Grounding of the GOT may cause el
4. GOT front face GOT rear face DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS E Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface ini BUS interface Standard interface BUS for connection to QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series or BUS for connection to QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 10 1 Communication Setting 10 3 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen 10 4 3 Channel number specification menu BOX 0 1 Set when the communication interface is not used Set when connecting to PLC or microcomputer Only one can be set among arbitrary communication interfaces Set when connecting to a bar code reader Set when connecting to PC GT Designer2 For USB and RS 232 interfaces the simultaneous setting is possible However when either interface is communicating the communication is not allowed for another interface e Setting is not allowed for 2 to 7 Fixed to 9 for the USB interface Fixed to 1 for the BUS interface 4 Driver display BOX The name of the communication driver for which a channel number is assigned is displayed None is displayed in the driver display BOX in the following cases e The communication
5. 12 13 3 CF card cover opened z Zz No Name Specifications 7 a For communicating with controller PLC microcomputer board bar code 1 RS 232 interface reader etc or personal computer OS installation project data download transparent D sub 9 pin male For communicating with controller PLC microcomputer board etc w 2 RS 422 interface D sub 9 pin fomai 2 rar Hole for the inserting installation fittings accessory during the GOT te 3 Hole for unit installation fitting installation to the panel 4 holes at top and bottom A 4 Rating plate nameplate 5 CF card access LED Lit CF card accessed Not lit CF card not accessed eni prohibiting access to CF card before removing the CF card from the 6 CF card access switch ON_ CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF No access to CF card CF card removal possible 7 7 CF card cover Open or close when inserting or removing the CF card x n 8 Option function board option Connect when using optional functions Z 9 Option function board cover Remove when using the option function board 10 Reset switch Hardware reset switch Use an isolated rod to operate 11 Battery cover Open or close when replacing the battery P terminal and FG terminal f ly 24VDC to GOT and 12 Power terminal aa an erminal for power supply C to an 2 13 Power terminal cover Open or close when connec
6. Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15 PRN Video input unit GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 Video RGB unit Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT CF card unit GT15 CFCD CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET External I O unit GT15 DIO Sound output unit GT15 SOUT 14 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set o Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description Memory card CF card GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 256MC Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC Option function board GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50FNB Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT Protective Sheet USB environmental protection cover GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW GT15 UCOV GT11 50UCOV GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND AQGT 50STAND Stand GT05 50STAND Attachment GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 Backlight GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT
7. ja ZZ Window move buzzer Toudidnitemto SES Security setting change settings E O00 Utility call key Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standar d 0 ms o Z Zo mae O59 a5 oak oto H Restart after setting chan fa Point estart after setting change 9 es lt If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the X button after the z Q setting of each item excluding the security setting is changed and touch the EN button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart 5 After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected W GOT setup 5 If touch X the GOT restarts m and the changes are reflected 5 Oo Zz fe 59 On 35 oa 8 f u ORE ZoS Ex a8 Zan 11 3 Operation Settings 11 11 11 3 2 Display operation of operation setting 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Buzzer volume window move buzzer zx 4 Setting items are changed if setting item is touched Buzzer volume OFF Window move buzzer ON D e B e aaS Security setting Setting uzzer volume SHORT LONG _ OFF Utility call key Setting D TA Window move buzzer OFF _ ON Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms OK Setting contents are defined if OK button
8. seRIAL 540001 Bc MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN J 550D26101A 80M1 IND PONT EQ c US LISTED y T T Control number Year example 2005 Month example Apr 1 to 9 Jan to Sep last digit X Oct Y Nov Z Dec b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA A MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL 4 MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ IN_24VDC gt POWER MAX 00W SERIAL _00007201DP00001 A lt 2 Eg MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Date e g 1st 1 to 31 1st to 31st Year e g 2007 The last two digits T i of the Western calendar year Month e g February 1 to 9 Jan to Sept X Oct Y Nov Z Dec 2 Battery procurement The battery is susceptible to natural discharge Order one when necessary 8 4 Battery 8 9 8 4 3 Battery replacement procedure SYSTEM OVERVIEW EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION 8 5 Protective Sheet The protective sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated 8 5 1 Applicable protective sheet The following protective sheets are applicable for GT1100 Product name Model Contents GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB Protective sheet Prote
9. 35 0 1 38 33 0 1 30 e 42 0 1 65 JE a 49 9 1 97 55 3 2 18 oo 3 neam 60 0 2 36 Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 8 The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type Moreover there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set O Applicable x Not Applicatble Not required Dan Setting items Function GT15 aor tong GT11 ae Channel No setting and communication driver fans O x O O assignment to communication interface D Communication parameter setting O x O O Sequence program protection key word setting a F O x O x c i When connecting FX series PLC 2 Connection 3 detail settings Sequence program protection key word deleting m x m z S When connecting FX series PLC 2 Sequence program protection status cancel When connecting FX series PLC n A x Opening screen time setting O O O O Screen save time setting O x O O Screen save backlight ON OFF setting O O O Message language switching Japanese English
10. 53 2 09 Unit mm inch 20 152 5 99 Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ and GT1150 QLBDQ 167 6 57 ia 28 5 110 4 33 1 12 21 0 83 LY GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMI m GOT 1000 A gel wo lt 4 Ke ioe lt MITSUBISHI Vv 28 5 110 4 33 F112 62 2 44 SSS App 2 E 00000 00000 FE Fa QUOC reac _ ls 152 5 99 Appendix 1 External Dimensions W_ o t Wa ek p2 SS SE O amp KH M2 E Metric screw type 5 o El 2 o o x 3 Uag S o L cm o F ie p Qs 4 40UNC o Inch screw type e e SS fers DOS ron i Nos ojl TIS pe Ti Panel board thickness to be 5 mm 0 2 or less Unit mm inch External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA and GT1150 QLBDA 167 6 57 28 5 110 4 33 1 A 21 0 83 MITSUBISHI 110 4 33
11. refers to the menu of GOT utility refers to the button in the dialog box of GOT utility 1 8 9 1 klel mjo 4 0 KC De _ Enter S 13 4 13 3 Memory Check 13 3 3 Memory check operation 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW About GOT A GOT is installed on the panel surface of a control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC within the control panel The GOT PLC carries out switch operation lamp display data display message display etc CONFIGURATION SYSTEM For the display screen two kinds of screens are available user screen and utility screen 1 User screen GOT The user screen is a screen drawn by GT Designer2 The objects Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numeric display can be arditrarily arranged on the display A horizontal format or vertical format may be selected for displaying a user s project Moreover multiple screens created within GT Designer2 can be individually selected or overlapped for the display SPECIFICATIONS For details refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual PART NAME 2 Utility Screen The utility screen is a factory drawn horizontal screen that cannot be edited Installing the BootOS or Standard monitor OS in the GOT from GT Designer2 the utility screen is displayed T
12. Definition of ChNo O None es p 1 FA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Communication Settings Channe l Dr iver assign l j 2 The screen shown on the left is 1 AJ710C24 MELDAS C6 Change displayed 8 Barcode Touch the Change button 9 Host PC crane Ment x Touch the communication driver annel No Please select communication driver installed to the GOT A QnA QCPU bi 7 QJ71C24 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 _19 AJ 10C24 MELDAS C6 10 6 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting Channel Driver assign 1 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 Change 4 The Channel Driver assign screen is displayed again 8 Barcode Touch the OK button 9 Host PC Touch the Communication Setting Standard I F Setting A OnA OCPU GIT 1Co4 9 Host PC assigned ChNo USB 9 Host PC CH Driver assign Definition of ChNo O None 0K L FA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Point gt Communication driver 1 Multi channel function GT11 can install up to 4 communication drivers x button to return to the Communication Settings screen Check that the selected communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is After checking touch the OK button Touch the button The GOT restarts However multiple communication drivers cannot be used at the same time Multi channel function ca
13. ccccceeeseeereeeeeeeeeneeeees 13 1 Project data storage location ceee 13 1 13 5 Protective Sheet cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 8 10 17 2 R Required device ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenetees 2 1 Rough pre operation procedure se 1 5 S Screen data transfer cable 2 11 Security level change 11 10 11 14 Self CHECK nis eaa a atan aaas Taan 14 3 Set UDe a a a ele 11 1 Specifications ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 General specifications ccccecceseeeeeeeeeteees 3 1 Performance specifications cccccceeeees 3 2 Power supply specifications cceeee 3 6 SLANG eai tad tects et aaaea aaa ea 2 1 8 12 Standard monitor OS cece 9 1 13 2 16 2 DYSUS Ms cebvees vaca AE P I AEA 14 20 System Alarm 0 cccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeees 17 4 18 1 System Alarm Display 14 20 System configuration cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 2 1 System MONItOM 0 eee edida ts 14 1 T Third party PLC connection cable eee 2 2 Time setting and display cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 12 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting in bus connection 0 18 7 U Utility FUNCTION Mot em ec ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 2 W WINING e aceite ie dee aE aa 7 1 Index 2 MEMO Index 3 WARRANTY Please
14. O cle 1 Bus cable x 120 4 73 140 5 52 Name Type GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ 56 2 20 40 1 57 GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA 38 1 50 40 1 57 Unit mm inch 2 PC cable barcode cable 6 3 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 4 Make holes in the panel according to the dimensions list below 2 W Also ensure 10mm of space in upper and lower parts of the panel for mounting fixtures Horizontal format If the vertical format is selected the dimension must be rotated 90 degrees m 2 0 08 153 6 03 3 it t 10 0 4 or more E 20 eae ie ice nz O FF oe KR i g TO n A fa N 7 o m S a 10 0 4 D or more Unit mm inch g When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be maintained from other structures and devices Hy The below diagram represents a horizontal installation The same clearances must be maintained when rotating the GOT 90 degrees clockwise for a vertical installation S Installation Environment A D B When the CF When the CF E F card is not used card is used A In the presence o
15. Yy Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1 at OUT side to further locate the error positions Y Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error will not occur The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1 to the GOT 2 is judged faulty Replace the faulty bus connection cable with a new one End 18 9 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting YES POWER LED of GOT is off NO YES GOT POWER LED is lit in orange NO System Information YES function System Signal 1 is set NO YES GOT POWER LED blinks in orange green NO The possible cause is a GOT hardware fault 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring This section describes the countermeasures when GOT does not display the monitor screen GOT does not display the screen Turn on the power supply of GOT Backlight OFF during screen saving is set The setting of screen saving can be set in the GOT utility menu 1 The bit of Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal may be ON Confirm the bit status When ON set the bit to OFF 2 Backlight bulb is blown To replace the backlight contact your nearest sales office or FA Center Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center explaining a detailed description of the problem 1 For utility menu refer to the following
16. The following stand is applicable for GT1100 Product name Contents GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Stand A9GT 50STAND Stand for 5 7 8 7 2 Installing procedure Adjust to Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting fitting of fe 55 65 or 75 the stand Fe Angle adjusting fitting 2 Put the GOT into the stand from the stand front side and fix it using GOT the fixtures mounting face For how to mount the GOT refer to the following L gt Section 6 5 Installation Procedure For details of the stand refer to the following N GT05 50STAND L GOT1000 series User s Manual A9GT 50STAND L3 A9GT 50STAND User s Manual 8 12 8 7 Stand 8 7 1 Applicable stand 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and PLC screen display and operation method settings program data control and self check etc z O fam O Z S Wwe gt 5 Refer to the following for the utility function list LF Section 9 2 Utility Function List 2 e a 220 agoa a 9 1 Utility Execution Si 020 For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the C drive Flash memory Sz There are following three types for the installing Standard monitor OS methods Ke gt E Age oO 1 GT Designer2 GOT Ooty g aon Via USB interface or RS 232 interface e Inst
17. 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications 3 5 3 4 Power Supply Specifications e GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Specifications Item GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Input power supply voltage 24VDC 10 15 ripple voltage 200mV or less Fuse built in not 1 0A exchangeable Power consumption 9 84W 410mA 24VDC or less 9 36W 390mA 24VDC or less At backlight off 4 32W 180mA 24VDC or less Inrush current 15A or less 26 4V 2ms Permissible instantaneous a Within 5ms power failure time ae Noise voltage 1000Vp p Noise width 1 4s by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise Noise immunity f requency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth 10M or larger by insulation resistance tester across power supply terminals and earth Insulation resistance Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm2 Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal 0 5 to 0 8 N m screw 3 6 3 4 Power Supply Specifications e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Item Input power supply voltage Specifications GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA DC24V 10 15 ripple voltage 200mV or less GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Fuse built in irreplaceable Power consumption 1 0A 9 84W
18. Touching the OK button returns to the write read check Memory check screen returns to the Internal Flush memory area Memory check screen write read check Password error 14 6 14 3 Memory Check 14 3 3 Memory check operation Point P When error is found in the memory A When error is found by memory check the dialog indicating the area in which the S error occurred is displayed rd If an error is found in the D drive Internal SRAM format the internal SRAM For details of the formatting of the D drive Internal SRAM refer to the following 5 lt Section 13 5 Memory Card Format If an error is found in the C drive Flash memory or the D drive Internal SRAM right gt after formatting contact your nearest sales office or FA Center Ow If touch OK the screen returns to zur Internal Flush memory area the Memory check screen ozo write read error Q zz 8g Se Oot aram 0K Fra HUWA HEA oak OH Q Z lt z Q Si m 1 x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 14 3 Memory Check 14 7 14 3 3 Memory check operation 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 1 Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display check move check among screens 14 4 2 Display operation of drawing check Main menu Debug
19. Q Refers to the information Point p h Point P When drive is not displayed e required a When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following a Refers to the supplementary Remark explanations for reference CF card inserting removing method gt gt Section 7 1 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen Replace the CF card or Flash memory For details of Flash memory contact your neares sales office or FA Center The following example explains about Memory Check using Flash memory For the CF card memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory Indicates the items in which the detailed explanation is described manual chapter section item of the manual 0 0 0 Indicates the operation steps 1 Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen and touch the Check button Internal Flush memory area write read check INgelect the Ok button the numeric keyboard win ow is displayed Execute now If select the Cancel button the screen returns to the initial menu OK Cancel Menu and items are differentiated with parentheses 2 Touch BEA and then Enter The password is fixed to 5920 Touching Enter executes read write check for the flash memory
20. e u E ey 6oe Ex 28s sdo 10 1 Communication Setting 10 5 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting Channel and driver assignment operation GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD only The operation method for the channel and communication driver assignment is described here In this section the case for changing the computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 to CPU direct connection Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is described In the present example Communication Settings is not downloaded Point gt Before starting operation 1 Restarting the GOT After Communication Setting is executed the GOT automatically restarts If the project data is downloaded GOT starts monitoring the communication device after restarting Before starting the operation check for safe conditions 2 Setting retention Once being established Channel Driver assign is retained until Communication Settings is updated EEA ae x Install communication driver A QnA le us a QCPU QJ71C24 to the GOT O 1 AJ7 10C24 MELDAS C6 Communication Settings with ChNo RS232 9 THost PC AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 ChNo USB Communication Settings is not 9 Host PC downloaded from GT Designer2 CH Driver assign IE 10 After installing the communication driver touch the CH Driver assign button in
21. 8 6 8 3 Option Function Board 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board Removing Option function board 1 Turn the GOT power off f a Rise the lever for removing the option function board ce with a fingernail as shown in the figure on the right 3 Pinch the lever with fingers and pull up it vertically to remove the option function board Z Option function board z ai nz AE Groove for reverse o installation protection E O m my S A oO Point gt Precautions for installing removing the option function board A 1 Do not twist the lever when removing the option function board Otherwise the lever may be broken 2 Install the dummy cover when not using the option function board z a E W D x a oO W Zz O b zZ 9 zZ x OPTION 8 3 Option Function Board 8 7 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board 8 4 Battery The battery backs up clock data alarm history and recipe data A battery is installed to GT100 when the GT11 is shipped from the factory 8 4 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT1100 Model Contents Battery for backup of clock data GT11 50BAT alarm history and recipe data 8 4 2 Battery specifications Item Specifications Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Storage life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 2
22. Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P Description A9GTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC License key FD O Others Abbreviations and generic terms Omron PLC SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module Description Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation KEYENCE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE Sharp PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SHARP Corporation JTEKT PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation Toshiba PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION HITACHI IES PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Ltd FUJI FA PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Matsushita PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Yaskawa PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation Yokogawa PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Allen Bradley PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Allen Bradley SIEMENS PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SIEMENS OMRON temperatur Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON controller SHINKO indicating Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Shinko Technos Co Ltd controller CHINO controller
23. GOT setup Time setting amp display Program data control a Debug amp self check L Cleag 9 Touch Clean Please press top corner buttons simultaneous ly Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not operates 15 1 2 Operation of clean If touch the upper left and upper right corners of the screen at the same time the screen returns to the previous screen display Upper left touch position Upper right touch position For details of cleaning method refer to the following _ gt Section 17 3 Cleaning Method 15 1 15 1 Clean 15 1 1 Display operation of clean 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS Zz fe AND STANDARD MONITOR OS z Zz mi To execute the GOT utility BootOS or Standard monitor OS has to be installed in the C drive Flash 5 memory This chapter explains the installation using GOT Zz GT Designer2 CF card gt GOT 2 BootOS or Su Write OS standard monitor OS 290 file installation Bez gt When GOT is remote installed zuk easily using the CF card OZO ae the GT Designer2 CF card CF card in GOT GOT gt CF card gt GOT o BootOS or 2B wy Upload OS standard monitor OS SEO file installation Se Install OS from GOT to GOT using Tuk m gt the CF card aon Install the CF card ae card in Son 6 gt For details of the installation using GT Designer2 re
24. 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility screen and system alarms When touching the Language button the Select Language screen is displayed 1 7 Touch the button of a language to be displayed and then OK button and the language is selected The gt mark moves 9 4 9 3 Utility Display 2 Touching the X button restarts the GOT and the language on the utility is switched to the selected one 1 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual z Q 8 rA Ww gt 2 GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters Point gt When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and 3 _ the installed fonts are not matched g xt The following screen will be displayed 30 5 Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is Zy E switched to the selected one 95y Select Language o 25a English Zkz Tuc ay N 2 gt Era HWD WEG xng oak oth Q Z lt z a a o gt wo 20 LO x O W a O Ww im N d O Oo Zz fe 59 On z ag oa 8 we So 2 592 eda ASE Zan 9 3 Utility Display 9 5 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu
25. Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Korean O O 0 2 O German Battery alarm display ON OFF setting O O O Screen saving human sensor enable disable setting O x x x GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X 5 V S Human sensor detect level setting Display 6T1595 GT1585 GT1585 X S v S Display of human sensor detect time ii X 5 V S Human sensor OFF delay setting O x x x 671595 GT1585 GT1585 xX S v S Invert colors ON OFF setting CWO O x O x GOT Setup Brightness Liquid crystal brightness setting O x O x contrast saad i j adjustment iquid crystal contrast setting x x O x Continued to next page Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function O Applicable x Not Applicatble Not required a me GT Soft Drawing Z Setting items Function GT15 COT O GT11 Setting e Z Operation Buzzer volume setting O O O O 3p 43 Security level change Security z Security setting password input for each object Q O O K 22 Utility call key Utility call key setting O O O O Key sensitivity Key sensitivity setting O O x pal lt Key reaction speed Displaying key response speed O O x ae Wu Touch panel o 5 OF adjustment Ch Correcting touch position reading error O x x rz GT1595 S X Q QnA ladder monitor Setting of data holding destination for 5 setting MELSEC Q QnA ladder mon
26. When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared To display correct time Set the clock of GOT gt 12 1 Time Setting and Display When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time Time displayed at Operating hours Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change 14 9 GOT Start Time 14 23 14 9 3 Display of GOT start time COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes For cleaning method refer to Section 17 3 Cleaning Method 15 1 Clean 15 1 1 Display operation of clean Main menu 79 3 Utility Display Main Menu
27. Zz O Touching Drawing check in the Display check displays the screen describing the drawing check operation S Touch the upper right of the screen to start a drawing check z E Before execute drawing check 5 1 Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during the drawing 5 Pa check Touching the upper left part of the screen Tu returns to the Display check screen 220 Sirs Upper left touch Upper right touch ZNE position position 2 For GT1155 256 colors color display blue black Si red purple green light blue yellow and white is available For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales the colors are reduced to the 16 scale monochrome z es This section describes with an example using 28 GT1155 256 colors zsz oat AON Missing bit Color Check f OS By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order a Fuig blue black red gt purple gt green gt light blue yellow white A a Check missing bit and color visually Oar oto Q Z lt z Light blue Yellow a 5 heck check screen 1 If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen the following check screen is displayed Basic figure x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 Drawing Check 14 9 14 4 3 Display and
28. GT15 AC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 AC30B Cable length 3m GT15 AC50B Cable length 5m For connecting QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series expanded base and GOT For connecting QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series expanded base and A7GT CNB GT15 A370C12B S1 Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B S1 GT15 A370C012B Cable length 2 5m Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B Cable length 2 5m For connecting motion controller CPU A series basic base and GOT For connecting motion controller CPU A series basic base and A7GT CNB Small CPU long connection cable GT15 C100EXSS 1 GT15 C200EXSS 1 Cable length 10 6m Cable length 20 6m GT15 C300EXSS 1 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Cable length 30 6m For QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series to GOT long distance connection For A7GT CNB to GOT long distance connection Combination of GT15 FXCNB and GT15 COBS Product name Long inter GOT connection cable Description Model name GT15 C07BS Cable length 0 7m GT15 C12BS Cable length 1 2m GT15 C30BS Cable length 3m GT15 C50BS Cable length 5m For interconnecting GOTs GT15 C100BS Cable length 10m GT15 C200BS Cable length 20m GT15 C300BS Cable length 30m AOJ2HCPU connection cable GT15 J2C10B Cable length 1m For connecting the power supply unit A0J2 PW to GOT Buffer circuit cable
29. O O x added Key Code Key code used for Kana Kanji conversion l 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O x is added Key codes for user ID ascending descending order movement of cursor are 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O added Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 29 Other functions added ee Version of GT x GT GT Soft GT Item Description K Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Displays details in OS information project pi information alarm information hard copy Utility j 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x O information and advance recipe information properties Function to display the status of Network unit Aad MELSECNET H communication unit and 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x status display i aan CC Link communication unit Function for copying the installed OS or GOT data package Standard monitor OS 03 01 a data in the GOT main unit to the memory 2 43V O x O acquisition BootOS 03 01 M card Unlimited installation of Extended function OS and option OS can extended function be installed unlimitedly 2 18U BootOS 02 02 E O x x OSs and option Conventionally the limit was 10 OSs Built in option a BootOS 03 03 P GT15 FNB built in the GOT is enabled 2 58L O x x function board Standard monitor OS 03 03 Function for monitor
30. Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affe
31. The setup methods of clock data are shown below Time Setting amp display Clock setting Adjust If touch the clock display section the keyboard for input is displayed and the clock update stops 82 01 2005 12 34 56 TUE GOT internal battery Norma voltage status 16 71819 Del lt gt OU TI 213 4 Cancel Enter 2 Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below Input the scheduled time when the operation of is to be carried out since the input time is reflected at the time of the operation of The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date Key Contents o to 9 Key Input numeric value in cursor position gt Key Move the cursor Move the cursor to the left by one character when Delj Key is touched while inputting year Del Key month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed Enter Key The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the keyboard Cancel Key The update of the clock display does
32. Touch ey sizo Minimum 16 x 16 dots per key Maximum panel simultaneous key Maximum of 2 points presses Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max C drive 3 Flash memory Internal for storing project data 3Mbytes and OS Life Number of Memory p 100 000 times write times D drive SRAM internal 512kbytes battery backup Battery GT11 50BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data alarm history and recipe data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Guaranteed 1 year Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Environmental protective structure 4 Equivalent to IP67f JEM1030 front section when the USB environmental protective cover is attached Horizontal format 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 n Z O q O a O Mr a o EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 4 Specifications Item GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA W167 6 58 x H135 5 32 x D56 2 21 mm inch Excluding USB environmental protective cover Horizontal format External dimensions Panel cutting dimensions W153 6 03 x H121 4 77 mm inch Horizontal format Weight 0 9kg Excluding mounting fixtures Compatible software package GT Designer2 Version2 or later 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on
33. _ AON Point gt Notes on installing OS If the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS is installed such data on the GOT as the N project data will be deleted woe After installing the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS reinstall download E z necessary data E Qha E Spe Omtn a Sea em y AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 2 OS Information 13 6 13 2 1 Function of OS information 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information screen 13 7 Main menu Program data control CF Section 9 3 Utility Display rg amp display Program dataggontro al Debug amp self of Program data control OS information Belect drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory Select a drive and operate BootOS and D Internal SRAM OS files 13 2 OS Information 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information screen 13 2 3 Display example of OS information OS information screen Program Data Select drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM 708 information OS information screen Storage file folder display screen Program Data 708 information Install Upload Property Data check Number Item Contents i The drive of which file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is 1 Select drive a f not installed A Built in CF ca
34. a destination sz a aon Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder z Program Data Alarm information Enis WEG Ki ndName Size Date Time xa oak Osh alee NaN ey AND BATTERY Please select a destination Cancel i 4 Touch the folder display area to select a S Copy file name m ALARMHST CSV folder and then touch the Exec button 5 yg dest ination The confirmation dialog shown left is m Copy now displayed 5 6 On 2y Za uo oa 8 oc u BIR D3 Boe sdo 13 4 Alarm Information 13 28 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 13 29 Same named project data has already existed Do you want to overwrite OK Cancel Copy is completed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Touch OK button If there is no file of the same name in the copy destination folder starts to copy If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder If touch OK button starts to copy If touch Cancel button cancels to copy Q When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog 13 5 Memory Card Format Zz 5 13 5 1 Format functi
35. amp self check Self check lt gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Communication setting re GOT setup Time setting amp display Program data control Debus self check Touch Debug amp self check Display check Display check Debug self check Display check Draw i nggcheck Touch Drawing check Starting drawing check Touching Drawing check in the Display check displays the screen describing the drawing check operation Touch the upper right of the description screen to start a drawing check Point P Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases 1 There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color 2 There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn according to the layout and procedures described in Section 14 4 3 Display and operation of drawing check When missing bits occurs contact your nearest sales office or FA Center Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements A flicker may be caused in some display colors This is a characteristic of the LCD panel it is not due to a fault or failure of the product 14 8 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 1 Drawing check function 14 4 3 Display and operation of drawing check
36. eject button 8 2 8 1 CF Card 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Removing CF card CF card access Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF access LED switch Make sure that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED turns off the CF card can be installed or removed even during the GOT power on ACCESS OFF ON CF card GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 2 Push in the CF card eject button of the GOT to eject the CF card and then remove the CF card CF card eject button Point gt Precautions for removing the CF card 1 While the CF card access LED is on do not install remove the CF card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the CF card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card 8 1 CF Card 8 3 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card SYSTEM OVERVIEW EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor e The memory card adaptor is used to convert the CF card into the memory card Type II Install the memory card adaptor to a PC equipped with a PCMCIA interface to write the OS or project data on the CF card from the PC or load alarm history data from the CF card to the PC Refer to the following for the details related to CF c
37. touch Del key to delete the correcting z character and then reinput retype the new character g N 2 Password input cancel operation S When X button is touched the screen returns to the monitor screen Refer to the following for details on setting passwords A L gt GT Designer2 Versiong Screen Design Manual a Section 3 5 Password Setting ae iif 3a 8 Ae on 6oe et 298 sdo 9 3 Utility Display 9 7 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration 9 8 The basic configuration of the screen is as follows Title display Close Return button Main Menu 2 3 Screen The screen title name is displayed in title display part As the screen is composed of multiple ae layers the title including these layers is Window move buzzer ON Title display displayed Security setting Setting Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms If the title overflows the title display area the middle section is omitted and is displayed at the section a I GOT setup Menu call key nN Title display Please select keys Pressing time is effective OK only in case one point Close Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from moni
38. whether the version of the OS to be installed is the same as the current one or newer a window that has the version information and a message that asks whether to continue installation will appear Boot OS has been already installed Existing 0S Ver 01 00 A Expected 0S Ver 01 00 A Existing basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install lt The GOT screen that appears when the Boot OS was installed from the CF card gt Touching the _OK button will start the installation Touching the Cancel button will stop the installation 2 Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when installing Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed Standard monitor OS Ta O O Standard monitor OS 2 O O Communication driver l 2 O O Communication driver 2 O O Option OS Lay O O Option OS 2 O O Please match the number Point gt Checking method of BootOS Standard monitor OS version 1 Check the version of BootOS or Standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details L Section 13 2 OS Information 2 Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face a GT1155
39. 2 is touched p man English If OK button is touched without touching anguage ng iis X button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed Opening screen time Screen save time Screen save backlight OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Battery alarm display Cancel button The operation setting screen is displayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with X button after completing the setting of all items to change GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents Security setting Refer to the following for the security setting operation L gt Section 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key Refer to the following for the utility call key operation lt gt Section 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 12 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Key sensitivity setting o Zz ra D The keyboard is displayed if setting item is touched E Cancel Enter Q Enter the numerical value from the keyboard z Security setting gt Utility call key The key reaction speed according to the 290 key sensitivity setting is displayed sre Key sensitivity Max 8 j ain _Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms B Setting contents are defined if OK button OK is touched 11 al Zz mee gt 432
40. 20 14 8 1 System alarm display FUNCTION se reeniri AE E EEE EE EE AR 14 20 14 8 2 Displaying the system alarm display ssssessseseeeeseeereseetrresstttrrsttttrrstttttrrnstttnnnstttnnnsstennnnnen n 14 20 14 8 3 Operating the system alarm display ssesseeeeeeeeieesseerresstrretttttrtssttrrrsssttnnssttttnnnsttennssttennaeeen 14 21 149 GOT Start Me seee erme e e EEE ea aee EEEa Ea ERE AAE e LPEE e 14 22 14 9 1 GOT Start time FUNCTION esenoirei ainar ii ieia A EAAS ANTAD AAE ENE E ad EEA 14 22 14 9 2 Display operation of GOT Start time cece ce ceeeeeeceeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseceaaaaeceseeeeeeseeseesecesnseeeees 14 22 14 9 3 Display of GOT start time cece aiii eee tenets eet A a E A N a 14 23 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION OLEAN aoan ete 15 1 195 1 Cleah snars a e E eee aie mia a a 15 1 15 1 1 Display operation Of ClOAN ccccccccccee cece ceeeeeeeceaeeeeceeeeeeeeesecaaaaaaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeecesinaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 15 1 15 1 2 Operation Of Cle aM icci sce2ece cece dees eat ae eaa i daddies dco idea ete apa baadae 15 1 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS oaan a eateries 16 1 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation cceeeeeeeeeeeee 16 2 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 16 3 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card cc eee 16 4 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned ON ee eece
41. 3 SH 080532ENG Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable creation 1D7M26 method Sold separately a GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Describes extended functions and option functions applicable to GOT1000 series SHEO80SMENG 1D7M32 Sold separately 1 1 The manual in PDF format is included in the GT Works2 and GT Designer2 products Abbreviations and generic terms us o GOT Abbreviations and generic terms GT SoftGOT1000 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ed in this manual are as follows Description Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585 GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GOT1000 Series GT1550 GT1555 Q GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1560 GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT1500 GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 GT1155 Q GT115
42. 322 1 Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored Confirm device range p PLC CPU and parameter settings 2 AB L device S7 200 HC device OMPON temperature controller Set the data length of C0 C1 and C3 devices to 32 bits Available memory of the memory card is insufficient Insufficient memory media Check the available memory of the memory card on the Drive Information 330 capacity of GT Designer2 Confirm M card capacity lt 3 GT Designer2 Versiong Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Section8 4 Obtaining the Drive Information GOT to PC The memory card is uninstalled or access switch is OFF in drive Memory card not installed or M j n f 331 1 Install the memory card in the specified drive CARD switched OFF 2 Turn ON the access switch ae Memory card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly 332 Memory media is not formatted Format the memory card 394 Memory media error Memory card is faulty Replace memory media Replace the memory card The BCD BIN conversion disabled data is being displayed input BCD BIN conversion error 345 1 Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value Correct data E i 2 Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer The contents of the recipe file are not normal 354 Recipe file error 1 Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the memory card Confirm content of recipe file 2 Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the memory
43. 4 8 5 9 2 9 3 Chapter 10 11 12 13 Section 14 1 14 3 16 2 16 3 17 4 Chapter 18 Appendix2 Appendix 4 Additions Section 13 6 16 4 Nov 2006 JY997D17501 C Partal correcting May 2007 JY997D17501 i This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses ABOUT MANUALS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Section 2 2 7 1 9 2 9 3 10 1 Chapter 11 Section 13 1 Chapter 14 Section 16 3 16 4 Appendix1 Appendix2 Appendix 4 Section 7 2 13 7 14 8 14 9 Partial revisions ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Section 4 1 Appendix 4 Section 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 6 1 6 5 7 1 8 1 2 8 3 10 1 3 11 2 1 13 1 3 16 4 18 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum OUTLINE PRECAUTIONS e This manual provides information for the use of the graphic operation terminal The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as fol
44. 4 upper lower parts 6 7 Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Failure to do so may distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the protective sheet GT1155 QSBD GOT GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBD GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 5Nem 0 36 to 0 48Nem Enlarged view Mounting bracket Mounting screw GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Enlarged view Mounting bracket Mounting screw GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA 4 A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment Remove the film when the installation is completed 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING i WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER gt Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100Q or less which is used exclusively for the GOT 7 A i O Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction ig nz Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal Do arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the speci
45. 410mA 24VDC or 9 84W 410mA 24VDC or 9 84W 410mA 24VDC or less less less With backlight off 4 32W 180mA 24VDC or less Inrush current 15A or less 26 4V 2ms Permissible instantaneous power failure time Within 10ms Noise immunity Noise voltage 500Vp p Noise width 1 us by noise simulator of 25 to 60 Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10MQ or larger as measured with the 500 VDC insulation resistance tester across power supply terminals and earth Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm2 Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal screw g Remark Qo 0 5 to 0 8 N m Operation at momentary power failure The GOT continues to operate even when the instantaneous power failure occures within the permissible instantaneous power failure time The GOT stops operating if there is extended power failure or voltage drop while it automatically resumes operation as soon as the power is restored 3 4 Power Supply Specifications 3 7 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 n Z O q O a O Mr a a EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 PART NAME 4 1 Front Panel No Name 1 Display scree
46. COPY CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY DISPLAY SECTION GOT SELF CHECK STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified The key position can be specified by one point or two points of 4 corners on the screen When the key position is specified by one point the time to switch to the utility when the key position is kept pressing can be set For default setting the upper left and upper right corners are specified Point P Operation settings by GT Designer2 Set the utility call key at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation Main menu ae GOT setup Operation settings gt Section 9 3 Utility Display i splay tti A t Touch GOT setup Key RNY Operation Touch Utility call key Menu call key GOT setup Menu call key Please select keys Touch buttons to set for the utility call key 11 16 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 11 5 3 Utility call key
47. COS elan are iola 025535 E Sena set T E A E EEE AA E 13 6 13 2 1 Function of OS information ioiai eita ataa ie aa a aa daaar aaie rana daai hiia 13 6 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information screen eecececcecceeeeeeeeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseesececenaesaeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 7 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 0 ccc ccceeeececeeccecceeee eee eeeeeeeeceaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseecsaceeaeeeeeess 13 8 13 2 4 Operation Of OS information ccccccccececeeeeeecenceeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeceaaaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeesesececacsueaeeeeeeeneess 13 9 13 3 Project IInTORMallon 2 24 ese aie ice ade cae tees tee tek ceed ete sete eee eae 13 14 13 3 1 Function of project information ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeecee A E E 13 14 13 3 2 Display operation of project information cccececeeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeceaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetesenneaceeeeees 13 14 13 3 3 Display example of project information ccecceeeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneaaeceeeeeeeeeeesenesenceneeeeeeenes 13 15 13 3 4 Operation of project information ccccceceeceeeceneeceececeeeeeeeeeceeeaaaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeseeececcnnuaeeeeesereees 13 16 RAAM NfO AlO i a r E A vencewecaamniaine 13 24 13 4 1 Function of alarm information 2 0 0 2 ccccccceeceeeeeceeceeeceeeeeee cece see ceeaaaeaaeceeeeeeseseeseesecnaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 24 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information ccccecceceeeeeeeeeceeceecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesencnssaeaeeeeeees 13 24 13
48. Description m 2 nz Confirming part names and i specifications of the GOT Detailed fa n 2 Confirming the GOT installation S Coman Detailed ue method g T a Confirming the mounting method for A communication units or option Detailed devices Overview gt me 5 Confirming the PLC connection i 7 method Detailed a Confirming the utility operation y method Detailed z 7 a Confirming error codes system i alarm displayed on the GOT Detailed 1 Stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format 6 3 Other manuals S The following manuals are also available The following manuals are stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format a GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Describes how to use the ladder monitoring function system monitor function and list editor for MELSEC A b GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual g a Describes how to use the gateway function c GT Simulator 2 VersionO Operation Manual Describes how to simulate the created project data with GT Simulator2 d GT Converter2 VersionO Operating Manual Describes how to use the GT Converter2 P O 1 4 1 1 1 Features Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices e Multiple languages are displayed using the Unicode2 1 compatible fonts and beautiful characters are drawn using the TrueType and high quality fonts e Two types of display modes are provided 256 color display and m
49. GOT while Booting is displayed on the GOT screen Booting is displayed on the GOT screen under the following conditions e Right after turning on the power to the GOT e When rebooting after transferring OSs and project data e When rebooting after changing the settings on the utility screen When the communication with GOT is attempted communication errors will occur on GT Designer2 Carry out the communication after Booting project data is displayed on the GOT screen It may take time to start the communication between the GOT and the controller depending on the type of controllers GOT starts the communication with GT Designer2 after the communication with the controller has been established 18 11 18 5 Starting GOT 18 5 1 Power Off APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD 164 6 46 J 22 120 4 73 ad 23 0 91 g f eje gt y Berea HID GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMIN a GOT 1000 Eg 5 t _ 4 40UNC S G Inch screw type q O lt M26 pE H ae Metric screw type sj EHIN a Kon 7 y M ed es NS 22 120 4 73 af a 0 87 HIS Panel thickness 5mm 0 2 or less CTT
50. Refer to the figures Remedy 1 1 and 1 2 below If the electric potential difference between the ground cable and the panel that houses the GOT is creating problems connect the ground cable to the panel also If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 1 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 1 2 lu a W gt Connection cable Connection cable Q Ground cable from the panel that houses control z Ground cable from equipment 2 the panel that Use the thickest houses control cable possible equipment m E N Use the thickest aS cable possible Panel grounding Remedy 1 1 7 Remedy 1 2 7 2 fe If taking Remedy 1 worsens noise interference taking Remedy 2 may alleviate it 3 ira O e Remedy 2 Refer to the figures Remedy 2 1 and 2 2 below a Attach a ferrite core to the cable if noise from the GOT panel has adverse effects on the GOT when Remedy 1 is taken Wind the wire around the ferrite core several times approx 3 times if a ferrite core is used If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 2 2 W lt Zz i Connection cable Connection cable n a Ground cable from the panel that houses control Ground cable from equipment a pea ae Use the thickest equipment cable possible D Use the thickest a cable possible Z Remedy 2 1 Remedy 2 2 o Zz O lt no zZ O Z x Zz Zz O a O 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 5 7 1 2 The cause
51. Section 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup Screen save and screen save backlight OFF function When using the screen save and screen save back light OFF function select valid invalid by the system information reading device in System Environment of GT Designer2 For system information details refer the following lt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 3 6 Setting System Information 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting Main menu GOT setup Section 9 3 Utility Display Display GOT setup Disp lay Language Opening screen time Sec Screen save time o Min 0 None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display COn N Touch Display x Touch an item to Brightness contrast Setting eee lt a Point Restart after setting change If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the button after the setting of each item is changed and touch the the GOT will restart x button on the GOT setup screen After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected GOT setup If touch X the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected 11 1 Display Settings 11 3 11 1 2 Display operation of display s
52. a particular type of GOT even when the function is compatible with the version In such a case check the version for the function and the version of the GOT and use GT Designer2 or OS of the later version Appendix 4 1 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT 11 Added GOT main unit Communication unit Target Models ee ra Version of OS Designer2 GT1595 XTBA 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1595 XTBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1585 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1565 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1555 VTBD 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA A GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 15 Version of GT P Target Models Version of OS Designer2 GT1155HS QSBD to GT1150HS QLBD 2 18U Standard monito
53. acklig GT15 60VLTN Multi color display board GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S Emergency stop sw guard cover o Software GT11H 50ESCOV Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works2 Version GT Designer2 VersionO Description SWEID5C GTWK2 E SWIID5C GTWK2 EV SWLID5C GTD2 E SWOID5C GTD2 EV GT Designer2 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Simulator2 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2 GX Developer Abbreviation of SWLJD5C GPPW E EV SWLID5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviations and generic terms GX Simulator Description Abbreviation of SWLJD5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions Document Converter Abbreviation of document data conversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series PX Developer oO License key for GT SoftGOT 1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License o License key for GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviations and generic terms License key Abbreviation of SWLJD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control
54. and FX2N Programmable Controllers GT01 C30R4 8P modified as shown in EX 1 F Ferrite core GT01 C30R4 8P Ex Tokin ESD R 17S or similar 250mm 100mm lt gt le Programmable controller a e i FOF F GOT units lt 140mm gt Comes equipped Added by user Added by user 5 3 2 Method to connect the power wire and ground wire The GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD unit requires an additional ferrite filter to be attached to the 24V DC power supply cables The filter should be attached in a similar manner as shown in the figure opposite i e the power cables are wrapped around the filter However as with all EMC situations the more correctly applied precautions the better the systems Electro magnetic Compatibility The ferrite recommended is a TDK ZCAT3035 1330 or similar The ferrite should be placed as near to the 24V DC terminals of the GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD as possible which should be within 75mm of the GOT terminal 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 5 5 5 3 1 About the cable used OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Sa PART NAME EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 6 INSTALLATION MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Be sure to shut of
55. be installed When the major version of the Boot OS to be installed is older than that of the current Boot OS the following warning dialogs will appear to prevent an accidental overwriting When installing from GT Designer2 follow the messages that appear on the PC screen a When only the Boot OS is stored on the CF card A message will appear to indicate that the installation cannot be proceeded Boot OS has been already instal led Existing 0S Ver 01 02 C Expected 0S Ver 01 01 B Because of version down GOT aborts installing ox Touch the OK button to cancel the installation Restart the GOT b When the Boot OS Standard monitor OS and other OSs are stored on the CF card The installation of the Boot OS will be skipped and an installation of the Standard monitor OS and other OSs will take place The following message will appear if the Standard monitor OS is already installed on the GOT Boot OS has been already installed Existing OS Ver 01 00 A Expected 0S Ver 01 00 A Existing basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install o Touching the OK button will start the installation Touching the Cancel button will stop the installation 16 8 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS Regardless of the types of data as described in section a and b above on the CF card or
56. cabinet mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control cabinet so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area d Earth the control cabinet with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies 22mm 2 wire or thicker is recommended e Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94inch diameter or less If the holes are 10cm 3 94inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below a Provide an earthing point near the GOT Earth the power supply s FG terminal FG Frame Ground with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 18inch or shorter The FG terminal function is to pass the noise generated in the GOT to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at hi
57. card format Recipe file make error i Failed to generate recipe file 352 Reboot GOT after inserting Reboot the GOT after installing the memory card memory card ae Failed to write in the recipe file Unable to write Recipe file 353 _ 1 Confirm the contents of the memory card Confirm memory card is inserted 2 Do not pull out the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 354 Recipe file write error rea Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file es 1 Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating 355 Recipe file read error a oe 2 Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the memory card Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe y function by specifying the file register name File system error occurred in Saas 356 PLC 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register Confirm file register name 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 4 J MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION wW 0 1 gs aja Zy at qa Xz wc a lt lt APPENDICES Error Error message Action code When executing the recipe funct
58. card will be deleted 5 2 lt Copy now on 3 Ok Cance alee NaN ey AND BATTERY Upon completion of OS Data copying a dialog that indicates a completion of copying will appear Touch the OK button to close the dialog window Copy is completed GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 36 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation Notes on copying operations 1 Copying the OS Project data to the GOT When the OS or project data are copied to the memory card using the GOT data package acquisition function and then to the GOT the utility settings will also be copied After copying the OS and project data to the GOT check the utility settings and reconfigure the settings as necessary 2 Storage of other data on the CF card When using the GOT data package acquisition function do not store any other data to the memory card Other data on the memory card will become unusable 13 37 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK Zz fej The GOT can display the screen for debugging or self checking 2 The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking function c Items Contents Reference page Debug System monitor A list editor and FX l
59. cece eter terete eee need seer tees eee teeee ee naeeeeestiieeeeesnieeeeenenaa 11 4 11 2 Brightness Contrast AGjUStMENL eee cette eee e eter eter ee teteeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaeees 11 8 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment function 000 2 eect ects ette eee eeeeaeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeeaees 11 8 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness CONtraSt eee eecceeeeceeenee erect eater eeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeseaees 11 8 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment Operation ccc ee eeeeee eee eeene eee eeeaeee eee taeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeaes 11 9 11 3 Per AL WOM es OU S Aeee and ia eee et aE litt tla crs ele Done Bt 11 10 11 3 1 Operation setting FUNCTIONS 0 0 0 T ee ee eee A T AA 11 10 11 3 2 Display operation of Operation Setting ccccceeeeceeeeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeniaeeees 11 11 11 3 3 Setting operation Of operation cccceccceececeeeeceeeeeeceenaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeesecececaececeeeeeeeeeesetecssaneeeeeees 11 12 11 4 Security Level Change cc 2c eek heh Be RU 11 14 11 4 1 Security level change functions 0 eect ee ee ente ee eee eete eee e eee ae eee eeeaaaeeeeeetaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeenaeeeeeneaas 11 14 11 4 2 Security change display Operation eee cette eee enne eee eeeeeneeee eee taeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeaas 11 14 11 4 3 Security level change operation cece etter e erent eee ee eneee eee eaaeeeeeeseeeeeesiaeeeeeesaeeeene 11 15 11 5 Uti
60. controller NEO 02 02 temperature The functions to automatically stop are controller Wi i Communication driver p monitoring faulty stations and to connection 2 58L OMRON THERMAC INPANEL O x O App 18 disconnect communications with controllers are added NEO 03 03 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series o Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Q Item Description Version of OS z Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 z 8 Supporting connection to SHINKO Communication driver z a ao 2 43V F ax O x O Se indicating controller Shinko Technos Controller 03 01 o SHINKO indicating Bu The functions to automatically stop ZO controller SZ monitoring faulty stations and to Communication driver connection 2 58L O x O disconnect communications with Shinko Technos Controller 03 03 controllers are added w Supporting connection to CHINO Q O x O a controller iw iinet Communication driver 3h controller i i gt i The functions to automatically stop 2 58L CHINO Controllers MODBUS Sog connection monitoring faulty stations and to ae lt x l E enna 03 03 O x O Kga disconnect communications with controllers are added Supporting connection to FUJI SYS Communication driver 2 32J O xX O FUJI SYS temperature controller FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 00 Op temperature The functions to automatically stop O controller m
61. driver is not installed gt Section 13 2 OS Information e 0 is set in the channel number specification menu BOX When setting the channel number to 9 the communication driver Host PC is automatically assigned Point Precautions for communication between GOT and connected devices 1 Installing Communication driver and downloading Communication Settings To perform communication with the connected device the following actions are necessary 1 Installing Communication driver Up to 4 OS installation 2 Assigning channel number and communication driver to communication interface Communication Setting 3 Downloading Communication Settings project data assigned in step 2 Perform 1 2 and 3 with GT Designer2 MV Use Communication Settings Standard I F Settings CHNo I F Driver Standard F4 fi gt MELSEC FX z Detail Setting Standard I F 3 x Host PC E Standard 1 F 3 s gt Host PC Ej OK Cancel For Communication Settings refer to the following manual gt GT Designer 2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication settings For installation of Communication driver OS and download of project data refer to the following manual GT Designer 2 VersionD Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Description of communication setting s
62. etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regulated units Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on the Time setting amp display screen utilities screen In addition confirm that the adequate battery life remains on the rating plate Transporting the GOT with the low battery voltage or the battery the reached battery life may unstabilize the backup data unstable during transportation Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Mar 2005 JY997D17501 Oct 2005 7 First edition A JY997D17501 Partial correcting ABOUT MANUALS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Chapter 1 Section 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 2 Chapter 6 7 Section 8 1 8
63. following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3
64. g i 2 58L O x X Stroke Standard Font China GB Stroke Standard Font 03 03 e Stroke Standard Font China GB supporting Hangul The following font is added Option OS 2 58L O x xX Stroke Font JPN Stroke Font JPN 03 03 Standard monitor OS 02 02 KANJI Regi S rting Chi Traditional 2 18U opion 9S egion upportin inese Traditiona 9 Pe j Standard Font China Big5 O O x 02 02 System alarm information printer status information and GT SoftGOT1000 end 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O GOT internal device are added device f Standard monitor OS 03 02 The devices for the trigger buffer of the 2 47Z Option OS O x x MES interface are added MES Interface 03 02 Supporting vertical installation type GOT Type 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x x O display Screen switching ON and OFF can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O function Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 23 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES Version of GT GT Soft GT Item Description i Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Station No Designation of the channel No for which ae i i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x Switching Function station No is swi
65. goes out The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor screen appears blank CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option function board on to from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board or battery or operating the reset switch wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity The static electricity can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the d
66. information Display operation of OS information 13 9 OS information screen Program Data 0S Belect drive A Built in CF card information C Flash Memory gt Internal SRAM Program KindName DIR G1S s Size Date Time 02 22 06 12 50 07 21 06 15 15 A 728KB OF i le Insta Up load Property Data checl 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information amp If touch a drive in Select drive the information of the first folder of the touched drive is displayed 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder name of the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch A button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch A button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the touched file name is selected and inverted QO Refer to the following for operation of installation upload property data check Installation a lt gt this section Upload ce lt this section Property oe lt gt this section ZI Data check ICF this section Touching button closes the screen Installation operation a BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive Built in CF card can be installed in GOT S ra Install the CF card to which the BootOS or E ke OS
67. lt GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL 2 43V De GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW 2 58L wes On GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 2 58L rox W lt lt Added connection types O Applicable x N A Applicable from the first version SA Version of GT 7 Item Description A Version of OS GT1020 GT1030 Designer2 Standard monitor OS 01 02 2 47Z Communication driver O APPENDICES Microcomputer Supporting the data formats of Format 1 and connection Format 2 Computer 01 02 Standard monitor OS 01 02 OMRON PLC a Supporting connection to OMRON PLC 2 47Z Communication driver O connection OMRON SYSMAC 01 02 N Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to MicroLogix 1000 1200 a 2 58L Communication driver O O 1500 series Allen Bradley AB MicroLogix 01 00 PLC connection Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to SLC500 series 2 58L Communication driver O AB SLC 500 01 00 Standard monitor OS 01 04 2 58L Communication driver O O SIEMENS S7 200 01 00 SIEMENS PLC Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 200 connection series Added GT Designer2 functions Ne Version of GT Item Description j Version of OS GT1020 GT1030 Designer2 Library Enables setting the background color of the 2 472 workspace figures in the Library Editor screen i Added common settings object
68. lt take actions referring to the error Z OMRON temperature wit message Zy controller only coe to Error code of the GOT main unit Kaa 300 to 399 function Error code of the GOT f GOT 400 to 499 ee i Section 18 2 communication function N Error code of the GOT main unit O 500 to 699 Q function a a CPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU User s manual of the QCPU and lt Value of SDO for QCPU QnACPU QnACPU connected with GOT Servo User s manual of the servo 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier d amplifier 2 amplifier connected to GOT The assigned error code for FXPLC is 100 to 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the error code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description 2 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code displayed on the servo amplifier to a decimal number and adding 20000 to it For this reason to refer to the manual of the servo amplifier based on the error code displayed upon a system alarm caused to the GOT subtract the error code by 20000 and convert the lower three digits into a hexadecimal Example If the system alarm displayed at GOT is 20144 the error code of the servo amplifier is 20144 20000 144 BIN 90 HEX 18 1 Error Contents Display 18 2 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below Error H E
69. noise a Use a noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker NFB electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and generators to suppress noise interference WIRING 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its impedance c Ground the power system and the control system separately OPTION 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Connect the power supply to the power terminals on the back panel of the GOT Use 0 75mm or thicker cables to avoid voltage drop and tighten the terminal screw with the specified torque securely GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD CF CARD ma OFF ON a PC and external INPUT device connection O 24V De cables FG mA Grounding 24VDC 100Q or less _ power supply GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA PLC connection cable PC and barcode 7S connection cable
70. od dar nets a i Le a 8 10 8 5 1 Applicable protective Sheet ceccececeecececceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeaaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseesennaneaees 8 10 3 5 2 Installing procedure vii en nec aiiiet thal sini tha ti ini elie antes 8 10 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover 00 0 eeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeeeees 8 11 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection COVED ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeenaees 8 11 8 6 2 Installing procedir E seceticd cco 223 eeas cd E EAE EA vetie aad teetue nad edeentondenes heed A 8 11 SLAIN s putes twas Sancta gh cha as wanes uy ces heed igo eed ee Giada tiie 8 12 8 7 T Applicable Stand a e tee veh dee dads as dda tele AEn e aaaea aude eee abe ages 8 12 3 7 2 Installing procedues arsine a a a a ag earn goths viet a cd eelae eas oie 8 12 9 1 Utilty EXOCUIOM 65 20 atanhconbcctnsavesidcertcnutcernabirane ceed devbeesetevestuie Seceduengsttusuee eetdexeswetweel 9 1 92 Utility FUNGHOM LISE a a aa e ar a re pred AAE aen a re Tea raae 9 2 oS Uni Deoa ana a N 9 4 9 3 1 Display operation of main MENU cc cecceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseecceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetecsseneaaeeees 9 6 9 3 2 Utility basic CONFIQUIATION 2 2 eect aa a aE ia neers ee NA A A AAAA aai 9 8 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings hanger assesinrara ert ennan eee e Ai aa E EAEE ONA ENARE EE ENTE 9 9 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETT
71. port module cable GT09 C200R40401 7T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40401 7T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC intelligent serial port RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P Cable length 3m module cable GT09 C30R21103 3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC Connection cables for MATSUSHITA PLCs Sold separately Product ve Model name Description name For connecting GOT to MATSUSHITA RS422 232C GT09 C30R20901 25P Cable length 3m conversion adapter For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of GT09 C30R20902 9P Cable length 3m DA RS 232 MATSUSHITA PLC computer communication unit cable For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of MATSUSHITA GT09 C30R20903 9P Cable length 3m PLC For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of MATSUSHITA GT09 C30R20904 3C Cable length 3m PLC Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately Product aie Model name Description name GT09 C30R40201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P Cable length 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40201 9P Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40202 14P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C200R40202 14P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R20201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20202 15P Cable length 3m RS 232 For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC bi GT09 C30R20203 9P Cable length 3m cable GT09 C30R20204
72. reset 307 Monitor device not set 15 42 49 CPU error No Error 14 20 14 8 System Alarm Display 14 8 1 System alarm display function 14 8 3 Operating the system alarm display System Alarm display resetting self check System alarm disp eq GOT error Reset 307 Monitor device not set 15 42 49 CPU error No Error Debug self check System alarm disp E9 GOT error Reset N 307 Monitor device not set 15 42 49 CPU error No Error amp Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being occurred Error causes can be identified by the error code error message and channel No displayed on the System alarm display screen lt 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM Touch the LReset button to reset system alarms Point P 1 Before resetting System Alarm display __ Eliminate each cause before resetting system alarms Without eliminating causes System Alarm display cannot be reset even when touching the Reset button 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset e GOT error code Write device e GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 14 8 System Alarm Display 14 21 14 8 3 Operating the system alarm display COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND
73. rr a Mow AON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 11 3 Operation Settings 11 13 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer2 Security level setting 0 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 5 8 Security function Password setting ceseeee GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 5 Set Password Point P Restrictions on screen display The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT 11 4 2 Security change display operation Main menu GOT setup Operation settings LC Section 9 3 Utility Display E GOT setup GAT setup Operation xX i zer vo SHORT ispla Operatign _ L Window move buzzer ON Secigity sett ins ili e Setting Touch Security setting Security level change Security settin GOT setup Security level change E3 Please input password Touch Security level change aan AC D Input the password of t
74. so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting m Mount the GOT onto the control panel while considering the following control panel inside dimensions Vertical installation of the GOT requires a space with the same dimensions as the horizontal installation z turned 90 degrees clockwise seen from the display side Point gt Applicable cable 6 a E Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT g Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as 26 well for installation GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 9 O 30 1 19 S ey 152 5 99 J o K My H CF CARD n or OS H lt RS 232 f o 1 y L fo A w N wo o RS 422 olo S a W gt s Unit mm inch a y S W No Name 6 1 PLC connection cable PC connection cable ka 6 amp pa pa z n z WIRING OPTION 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA A 152 5 99 gt kc No gt k Lo
75. structure and added import function 2 09K Improved user library structure expanded the user library registration capacity copying the figure data to the user library etc 2 18U Addition of fixed frame figure 2 18U Enables setting the background color of the figures in the Library Editor screen 2 47Z Enables sorting the figure data by subject or function and displaying different shaped figures in the same color in the image list 2 58L Project data matching Matching project data stored in GOT and project data opened on GT Designer2 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Copy ON OFF Copy OFF gt ON Enables copying of only characters in lamp display touch switch and comment display 2 18U Import Export Enables editing of the settings for advanced alarm observation advanced user alarm alarm history advanced recipe function and recipe function in the CSV file format and other format 2 18U Print Enables printing of header and footer 2 18U Data View Enables changing of the settings for the respective objects in grouped objects 2 18U Batch Edit Enables global replacement of channel No 2 18U Screen Preview Enables checking for security level switching and language switching in image after switching 2 18U Wizard Wizard for setting the GOT type controller type and communication settings when creating a new pr
76. to install is written to the GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card X CF Section 8 1 CF Card 2 q ow 30 9S information sereen Touch A Built in CF Card for drive Sie Program Data 0S information Sue selection fejm Belect drive 020 A Built in CF card Touching Install button starts the install a C Flash Memory bn gt EO Se D Internal SRAM ae Now aon 8 San Sog OS information screen Storage file folder display screen CAD Program Data 0S information DIR GISY S a Sea em AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK o When the installation is completed the Install is completed Restart now dialog shown left is displayed GOT restarts if touch button CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 2 OS Information 13 10 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive Flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in CF card Install the CF card used as the uploading destination to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card Section 8 1 CF Card OS MOMSEN Touch A Built in CF Card of Select Program Data 0S information drive Select drive Touching Upload starts the uploading C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information screen Storage file folder display screen 4 When the up
77. 0 Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD Handy GT1155HS Q GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT1100 GT11 Abbreviation of GT1155 Q GT1150 Q GT11 Handy GOT GT1030 Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 GT1020 Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW GT10O00 GT10 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GT1030 GT1020 Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series GOT800 Series O Communication unit Abbreviation of GOT 800 series Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z Interface converter unit 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 751IF900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set GT15 75IF900 O Option unit
78. 04 Report function Function to print the colleted data 2 27D Extended function OS O O x Report 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Compatible with the printer output 2 27D Extended function OS O x x Hard copy function Printer 02 04 Thumbnail Output can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x Extended function OS Operation panel i uct Enables setting the operation panel 2 58L External I O Operation Panel O x x unction 03 03 Sound output Extended function OS Enables setting the sound output 2 58L O O x function App 28 Sound Output 03 03 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series ae Version of GT GT GT Soft GT fa Item Description Version of OS Z Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 z 8 Function for loading the data read with bar Z 5 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 00 oO x O se cord reader to PLC CPU ah bw Number of settable devices is extended Z5 Barcode 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O SZ from 32 to 1024 points Space 0x20 or NULL 0x00 can be 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O selected for blank device w 0 i f f Standard monitor OS 03 00 E Video displ Function to display an image taken by a 2 32 Extended function OS ne ideo displa xtended function pray video camera on the GOT O x x Zp Video RGB 03 00 es Za l Standard monit
79. 14P GT09 C30R20205 25P Cable length 3m Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module 2 2 Component List 2 8 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 SYSTEM We OVERVIEW Zz O E T a oO iL Zz Q 1S SPECIFICATIONS EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Product name Model name Description GT09 C30R40301 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T Cable length 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40301 6T Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40302 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40302 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40302 6T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin RS 232 GT09 C30R20301 9P Cable length 3m j conversion cable cable GT09 C30R20302 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module Connection cables for Allen Bradley PLCs Sold separately GT09 C30R20701 9S Cable length 3m Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately GT09 C30R20801 9S Cable length 3m CF card Sold separately Product name Description For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley PLC Product name Description For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter Product name Model name Content
80. 15 QC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 QC30B Cable length 3m GT15 QC50B Cable length 5m GT15 QC100B Cable length 10m Description For connecting QCPU and GOT For interconnecting GOTs Long Q connection cable Long inter GOT connection cable GT15 QC150BS Cable length 15m GT15 QC200BS Cable length 20m GT15 QC250BS Cable length 25m GT15 QC300BS Cable length 30m GT15 QC350BS Cable length 35m For connecting QCPU and GOT over a distance of 13 2 m or farther Requires AOGT QCNB For interconnecting GOTs over a distance of 13 2 m or farther Bus cable for connection to QnA ACPU motion controller A series sold separately Product name Small CPU connection cable Inter GOT connection cable Model name GT15 A1SC07B Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B Cable length 3m Description For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and GOT GT15 A1SC50B GT15 A1SCO5NB GT15 A1SCO7NB Cable length 5m Cable length 0 45m Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC30NB Cable length 3m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and GOT For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and A7GT CNB GT15 A1SC50NB Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and A7GT CNB Large CPU connection cable GT15 C12NB Cable length 1 2m GT15 C30NB Cable length 3m GT15 C50NB Cable length 5m GT15 ACO6B Cable length 0 6m
81. 20 fa Zz Soo gt sz Qi Ooty aon CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND Point P Setting another key position when there are two Make the setting after changing either one of the key positions from gO to C Three of cannot be set at the same time Example When changing the two positions from the upper left and upper right corners to the upper left and lower left corners ia ed L nd gt p Ao Ot yl je Change the upper right L to Change the lower left to _ 11 18 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY The clock display setting items and the time when displayed the setting screen are displayed The voltage status of the built in battery is also displayed 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible Reference Function Contents page Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock Clock setting 12 2 data of PLC CPU connected with GOT Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT
82. 31 13 5 Memory Card Format 13 5 3 Format operation of memory card To format the CF card install the CF card to the GOT first For the CF card installation removal method refer to the following lt Section 8 1 CF Card Touch and select the drive to format by Select Drive If touch button the password input screen is displayed 4 Type 1 1 1 1 and touch the Enter key The dialog box shown on the left will appear The password is fixed to 1111 Confirm the contents of the dialog When execute the CF card format touch OK button When cancel the CF card format touch Cancel button If touch OK button by the dialog mentioned left is displayed for reconfirm QO Reconfirm whether to format the CF card If touch OK button starts formatting If touch Cancel button cancels formatting D When the formatting is completed the Format is complete Z completion dialog mentioned left is 2 x displayed 3 gt If touch OK button closes the dialog B Zz an c SE 3 Remark Restrictions on formatting 620 e When use an unformatted CF card in GOT format the CF card by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted CF card e The formatting of GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 a of the CF card and inherits the file system before formatting 252 See Oot Pow 13 6 Memory Infor
83. 4 3 The display example of alarm information c ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeecnceaeceeeeeeeeeseteceeececaeeeeeeeeeess 13 25 13 4 4 Alarm information Operation cccccceceeeeeeeeeeccecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecceaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeseesecseceeeaaecaeeeeeeereees 13 26 13 5 Memory Card Format tell eect OLR a hte thd id ae aes es Paes 13 30 13 5 1 Format function Of memory card reier aT A TA A E 13 30 13 5 2 Display operation of memory Card formMat cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaeeeeeteaeeeeeeenaeeeeesenaaes 13 30 13 5 3 Format operation Of memory CaLd cc ceeeeeeee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeesenaeeeeenenaaees 13 31 13 6 Memory IMIORM ANON 22 222 fccehee ee da dartetent ncn scicatadeen ceencesatecelpene eae tezatnece ie 13 32 13 6 1 Memory information Tanede ere aranira nei En Ee EE AEEA EAE EEOAE RENES 13 32 13 6 2 Memory information display operation sssesseeeeeeeeeeseeerresttrrsstttrrtssttrtnastttnnsstttnnsssttnnnnsten rnnt 13 32 13 6 3 Display example of memory information sssssseeeeseeeeereseerressttrrssstttrtsstttnrnssttnnnssatennnssteennnt 13 33 13 7 GOT data package acquisition sc 2uccssceaseseveelanay seis ghestestites esos she vpaseauieetuaaskasseaathe 13 34 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition ccc eeeeceeeeceeecce eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 34 13 7 2 Operating the GOT data package acquisition function cccceccecceceeeeee
84. 5 C Application For backup of clock data alarm history and recipe data 8 4 3 Battery replacement procedure Replace battery periodically at intervals of 4 to 5 years as reference D Turn the GOT power off D Open the back cover of the GOT Remove the old battery from the holder 4 Disconnect the old battery connector and insert the new battery connector within 30s Insert the new battery into the holder and close the back cover O Turn the GOT power on Ng amp D Check if the battery condition is normal with the utility ia Refer to the following for the details of battery status display Connector gt Chapter 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 8 8 8 4 Battery 8 4 1 Applicable battery Point 1 Battery life _ The battery life is approximately 5 years The production date of the optional replacement battery can be confirmed by the lot No marked on the nameplate label affixed on the battery Nameplate Model name Connector LOT 5 4 Year example 2005 1 E Month last digit example Apr 1 Jan to 9 Sep X Oct Y Nov Z Dec The production date of the battery built in the purchased GOT can be confirmed by the production No serial No marked on the GOT main unit a GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD A MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX
85. A drive A drive Property display of project file Date version and screen title Data check of project file Alarm information Deleting alarm log file Copying alarm log file Memory card format Formatting of CF card and Internal SRAM Memory information Display of free memory space in GOT GOT data package acquisition Copies the OS and project data to the memory card Debug amp Self check p Device monitor of PLC Test function Present value change of the buffer memory System monitor A R monitor and the buffer memory of intelligent module Debu g A List editor Sequence program and parameter change of ACPU FX list editor Sequence program and parameter change of FX PLC A drive memory check Standard CF card Memory check C drive memory check Built in flash memory Drawing check Missing bits color draw display and overlap display check of liquid crystal Font check Installed fonts check Self check Touch panel F Touch panel operation check checking Connected target confirmation I O check Self loopback check 4 System alarm display Displaying GOT errors CPU errors network errors Resetting GOT errors GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating hours Clean Clean Display the screen to clean the display section 1 Perform the following with the GT Designer2 e Installing the comm
86. A list editor iM FX list editor Display Debug Example of system monitor 14 2 14 1 Debug 14 1 2 Display operation of debug 14 2 Self Check 14 2 1 Self check function Carries out self check for the GOT hardware or memory etc The items that can be self checked are as follows Items Contents Reference page Carries out write read check of the Built in CF card Flash memory and Internal Memory check SRAM 14 4 Password 5920 fixed Drawing Check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 14 8 Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually 14 13 Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit Touch panel Check 14 15 16 dots x 16 dots Carries out RS 422 and RS 232 connecting target confirmation CPU I O check communication check and the RS 232 self loopback check hardware check of 14 17 the RS 232 interface 14 2 Self Check 14 2 1 Self check function 14 3 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY 4 O W ja O We Ww cp M DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 Memory Check 14 3 1 Memory check function The memory check function carries out the write read check of the Standard CF card Flash memory
87. Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION Temperature ere temperature Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd controller YAMATAKE temperature controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by YAMATAKE YOKOGAWA temperature controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation RKC temperature controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD GOT server Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT client Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer2 Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Functions This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer2 Version 2 58L For the added functions by the product version upgrade refer to the list of functions added by GT Designer2 version upgrade in Appendices Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual 13 3 3 Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory
88. BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O Ww I O Wwe l i 7 E ie O DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations Touching Touch panel check of Self check displays the screen explaining the touch panel check operation Touch the OK button to start the touch panel check Touch a part of the screen piers A The touched part becomes a yellow filled display If not displayed in yellow even when touched the display part may be faulty In this case contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 1 For a monochrome 16 scale GOT the part is displayed with a subtracted yellow color I Black filled screen If touch the upper left part returns to the Self check screen Upper left touch position Remark Checking the upper left part of the screen Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returnes to the Self check screen by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally 1 For a monochrome 16 scale GOT the part is displayed with a subtracted yellow color 14 16 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations 14 7 I O Check Zz O o 14 7 1 I O check function 2 The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other 5 If I O check ends normally the communication in
89. Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment function Brightness or contrast can be adjusted GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD only Function Contents Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels Brightness setting Contrast setti Contrast of display part can be adjusted by 16 levels ontrast settin 9 GT1155 QTBDQ and GT1155 QTBDA excluded 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness contrast Main menu GOT setup Display Section 9 3 Utility Display Touch GOT setup Touch Brightness contrast Brightness contrast GOT setup Brightness contrast Touch to adjust the brightness Touch to adjust the contrast 11 8 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment function 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment operation GOT setup Brightness contras 3 Brightness setting 5 8 ast setting 9 16 YO With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK OK snesl Brightness can be adjusted by touching key of brightness adjustment 2 Contrast can be adjusted by touching key of contrast adjustment amp Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched 4 If OK button is touched withou
90. CE KV700 1000 02 02 SHARP PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to SHARP PLC 2 09K O x O connection SHARP JW 01 02 Communication driver TOSHIBA PLC F Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC 2 09K TOSHIBA PROSEC T V O x O connection 01 02 JTEKT PLC F Communication driver Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2 32J O xX O connection JTEKT TOYOPUC PC 03 00 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES Wer Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Communication driver HITACHI IES PLC HITACHI HIDIC H 01 02 Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 09K O x O connection HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 01 02 HITACHI PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 43V lt 3 O x O connection HITACHI S10mini S10V 03 01 FUJI FA PLC f Communication driver Supporting connection to FUJI FA PLC 2 43V O x O connection FUJI MICREX F 03 01 Communication driver Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLO 2 09K MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP O x O 01 02 Communication driver Supporting connection to FP 2 2 18U MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP O x O MATSUSHITA 02 02 PLC connection Supporting connecti
91. GOT s OS project data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button Select Dr ive FT at Built in CF card Description 3 Setting items 1 Displays the drive to which the user can copy the OS and data A Standard CF Card will not appear if a CF card is not inserted Drive selection 2 Copy Copying begins when Copy is touched 13 35 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation Zz 5 5 GOT data package acquisition operation on the display gt Copy the following OS that is installed on the GOT and data to the CF card E GOT data package acquisition x Touch A Standard CF Card under Select GOT s OS project data are copied to O 2 highlicht it l es the CF card This CF card can be use MYELO TEMS OE Ns 6 for installation when the GOT is Touch the Copy button to begin copying 7 turned on 2o P lease select a destination and Suz push Copy button EE Ofn Select Drive A Built in CF card 8z Zy gt 20 ace Ont OON i Different dialogs appear depending on the Caut an ae status of the copying destination Follow Copy destination the dialog that appears 9 amp zA a GOT data are already exist ERS If execute copy operation all GOT D a data on the CF
92. GT15 EXCNB Cable length 0 5m Can be used as a GT15 COEXSS 1 when used in combination with GT15 COBS Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately Product nee Model name Description name GT09 C30R40101 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication GT09 C200R40101 9P Cable length 20m module serial communication board RS 422 GT09 C300R40101 9P Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40102 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40102 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit GT09 C200R40102 9P Cable length 20m communication board GT09 C300R40102 9P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication GT09 C30R20101 9P Cable length 3m ae fi Le RS 232 module communication board serial communication board cable GT09 C30R20102 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable GT09 C30R20103 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs Sold separately Product ee Model name Description name GT09 C30R41101 5T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41101 5T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C200R41101 5T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R41101 5T Cable length 30m GT09 C30R21101 6P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 bl GT09 C30R21102 9S C
93. HI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 80M1 IND CONT EQ c US LISTED 5 2 2 Connection format Connection conditions where the GT11 is applicable to the EMC Directive are shown below Connection format CPU direct connection RS 422 Point f If connecting to a PLC not from this company MELSEC FXa2Nn series refer to the ay manual of the connected device PLC microcomputer for information about the applicability of the EMC Directive 5 4 5 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable 5 2 1 About models applicable to the EMC Directive 9 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives Connect and wire GOT equipment as instructed below If the GOT equipment is configured in a way that differs from the following instructions then the system will not comply with EMC directives 5 3 1 About the cable used Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise Therefore when installing any communication cables care should always be taken with the routing and location of those cables The GOT units identified on the previous page are compliant with the EMC requirement when the following communication cables are used GOT Unit Existing Cables User Made Cables GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD Those cables need to be independently tested by the user to demonstrate EMC compatibility when they are used with Mitsubishi GOT unit
94. ILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL The display of OS project data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or CF card and the data transmission between GOT and CF card are possible The format of the CF card is also possible 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 1 Drive name allocation For the Built in CF card Flash Memory Internal or Internal SRAM the following drive names A drive C drive and D drive are allocated Drive name Allocation A drive Built in CF card C drive Flash Memory Internal D drive Internal SRAM 13 1 2 Data type and storage location At system startup The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below E GOT main unit Install S Download p Project data D drive C drive Upload PC Internal SRAM Flash Memory Internal Project data GT Designer2 Install Download Open a file BootOS Project data Project data Project data A drive BootO Project data Built in CF card Built in CF card when installed in GOT when installed in PC 13 1 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 1 Drive name allocation At maintenance 5 ra 5 Zz m gt HE GOT main unit Zz O z ow Zo D drive C drive sxe SEF Internal SRAM Flash Memory Internal S52 PC GT Designer2 Upload 2
95. IMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications are subject to change without notice
96. ING csseeeeeeseeeeeeees 10 1 10 1 Communication Setting eh fade cet arom eer ed otal ad Id are ero ia sade Sed 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting FUNCTIONS aeaa AE EE ai a ATE E 10 1 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation sesssseseeesseseeeeseerresterrsssttnnsttttnnssnttntnnstennnnnatennnnnena 10 1 10 1 3 Description of communication setting SCreen ssseeseseseeireseertessetrrsstttrrsttttrrsssttnrssstnnnssrenn 10 2 10 1 4 Operation of communication Setting ec etree erent ee eee ete ee eee teeeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeenea 10 6 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 1 scincdenias occ date lee 10 9 10 2 1 Communication detail settings FUNCTIONS 00 ccc eee ctee ee eetete eee erent eee eeeeaeeeeeetaaeeeeeesneeeeeeeeaees 10 9 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display Operation cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetaeeeeeeenaaees 10 9 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings cee eeeeee eee eeteeeeeeeteeeeeeetteeeeereeaa 10 10 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP settee eee es 11 1 Tiel Display Settings nitrum ane alas DEIN eG eae aes 11 1 11 1 1 Display setting fUNCtIONS 0 cceceeecceceeeeeeececeeeeeeeceeeeensecceeeensnaneeeenssaacecensneacaeceenenaneceensaneceeenenanes 11 1 11 1 2 Display operation of display Setting ec eceeeeeeeeeeete eee eeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeenaees 11 3 11 1 3 Display setting operations
97. MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL T1000 GT11 User s Manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Fe eal ga ac Tee eg ice Oy ee ee pp ay eee ot a cee Pet nee cee Go Oe ong nt Sew A oe etree I l F Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous I l I O DANGER conditions resulting in death or severe injury l I i Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous I i A N CAUTION conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage 1 J Note that the N caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Some failures of the GOT or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or m
98. ND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 8 1 1 Applicable CF card The following CF cards are applicable for GT1500 Model Description GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB Point gt The flash PC card of the GOT A900 series In the GT11 00 the flash PC card for GOT A900 series cannot be used Use the CF card which is described in the above 8 1 CF Card 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable CF card OVERVIEW SYSTEM PART NAME SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATION EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION foe WIRING OPTION 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Install remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF Installing D Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF and make sure CF card CF card access that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED access LED switch turns off the CF card can be installed even during the GOT power on im ACCESS OFF ON CF card GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD CF card front face To install the CF card to the GOT insert the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside Push in the CF card until the CF card eject button snaps Turn the CF card access switch on After the CF card access switch is turned on the CF card can be used CF card
99. Operating 0 to 50 C F section T ambient sa Other than i l mg temperature __ 0 to 55 c when horizontally installed 0 to 50 c when vertically installed mE display section LE nO Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C 3 Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing g O Half Frequency Acceleration Sweep Count lt amplitude Compliant Under 5 to 9Hz 3 5mm D Vibrationresistance WAIS interatatteeta 9 to 150H 2 10 ti h a B3502 and vibration PONS E i i ie ae in an 1IEC61131 2 Under 5 to 9Hz 1 75mm directions continuous 9 to 150H F vibration o 4 9m s z i E 2 Fi d Shock tesista ce Compliant with JIS B3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Ha lt Must be free of lamp black corrosive gas flammable gas or excessive amount of c Operating atmosphere i electroconductive dust particles Operating altitude 2 2000 m 6562 ft max W Installation location Inside control panel Z x O Overvoltage category Il or less Fd a Pollution degree 2 or less 9 Cooling method Self cooling a 4 STN liquid crystal type to be stored at or below 39 C WBT 2 Do not use or store the GOT under pressures higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure 5 to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction Ee 3 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assum
100. QSBD GT1150 QLBD wa MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SERIAL 540001 BC BC L BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION version MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 80M1 IND CONT EQ c US LISTED 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 9 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Pe CLEANING OF N O g O we 2 6 zZ a szp Iu miopaj 258 Nat Zan b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ IN 24VDC POWER MAX 00W __ SERIAL __00007201DP00001 A DP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN sE BootOS version 16 10 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 5 CoreOS z 5 5 Install CoreOS only if the GOT is not in its factory shipped condition even if BootOS is installed Normally installation is not required B 5 Point P Precautions when installing CoreOS The installation cannot be interrupted z The followings should not be performed during the installation of CoreOS E ow GOT may not operate Z20 Zz e Turning OFF the GOT power Stir e Pressing the
101. Replacement The battery is used for backing up the clock data alarm history or recipe data It is recommended that you replace battery periodically Refer to the following for the replacement procedure fa z lt x Ww O Z lt x Z iu Z lt INSPECTION Section 8 4 Battery The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility screen and system alarm Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility screen C gt Chapter 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM System alarm APPENDICES 500 Warning Built in battery voltage is low Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display L GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Point P Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for approximately a month after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that If it exceeds a month from the voltage low detection to battery replacement the clock data or D drive Internal SRAM data may become indefinite Adjust the clock and format the D drive Internal SRAM 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacemen
102. S 03 01 O O x possible Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 31 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES Item MES interface function App 32 Dee Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 p Standard monitor OS 03 01 Function to execute data linkage between i 2 43V Option OS O x x the control and information systems MES Interface 03 01 Oracle 8i ACCESS2000 ACCESS2003 and MSDE2000 are added to the Standard monitor OS 03 02 applicable database l a 2 47Z Option OS O x x The trigger buffering function is added MES Interface 03 02 Enables setting Do not sample for the sampling setting in the device tag settings Industrial SQL Server 9 0 and Microsoft Standard monitor OS 03 03 SQL Server 2005 are added as an 2 58L Option OS O x x applicable database MES Interface 03 03 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Appendix 4 2 For GT10 aQ Zz lt i 3 P n Lu GT Designer2 Version 2 43V or later is applicable to GT1020 oF GT Designer2 Version 2 58L or later is applicable to GT1030 2 a Zo r r lt Added GOT main unit 2 Version of GT Target Models 1 Version of OS w Designer2
103. S to be transferred T Memoy cart C z Empty area size 1547256 kbyte Clos O u a e O Oo Zz fe 59 On z iz 3a 1 im je zZ 9 wi i n O x fo Ea oS lt P Re Og of an 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 16 3 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card There are the following two types for the BootOS Standard monitor OS installation using CF card 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on When the GOT is turned on all the OS and project data stored in the memory card are transferred to the GOT This installation method is valid for the following cases e When the utility of GOT cannot be displayed e When the standard monitor OS is not installed To create a GOT with the same configuration as the copy source by using the GOT data package acquisition function 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility By the operation of the utility the OS and project data stored in the memory card are selected and transferred to GOT Point P Notes on installing the Boot OS and Standard monitor OS 1 Installing both the Boot OS and Standard monitor OS Install the Boot OS first and then install the Standard monitor OS When the Boot OS is installed the built in flash memory on the GOT becomes initialized to the factory setting All OSs and project data will be deleted The Boot OS comes factor
104. SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 3 Project Information 13 22 13 3 4 Operation of project information Upload Transfers the project data from the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Built in CF card Upload Do you want to upload Cancel The project data is already existed If upload is done the project data is deleted Do you want to execute Upload is completed 13 23 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Mount the CF card to GOT For the CF card installation removal method refer to the following Section 8 1 CF Card Touch A Standard CF card in the drive selection If touching Upload button the screen shown on the left is displayed 4 If touching button the upload is executed 5 If there is a project data of the same name in the A drive the screen shown on the left is displayed without starting the upload If touching OK button an overwrite upload is executed to the project data of the same name If touching Cancel button the upload is canceled Q When the upload is completed the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed If touching OK button the dialogue box is closed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information The alarm log file held by the D drive Internal SRAM is displayed The functions below can be carrie
105. Start the monitor Display each screen z y End 0 zZ z O e ai 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Option function board Protective sheet CF card CT T Bar code reader I gt FS Commercially available Memory card Commercially available LS gt Ld Lf CF card Memory card adaptor GT1 00 does not connect a printer 2 1 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 2 Component List 1 Explanation of the GOT model name GT1155 x 2 Built in RS 232 c icati ommunication Q Built in Q bus ie OVERVIEW eee A Built in A bus Blank Built in RS 422 Power type A 100 to 240VAC D 24VDC L 5VDC Z0 T Panel color type Black Do TFT color High intensity wide angle view TFT color STN color STN monochrome Display device type a Say roz4 oD Resolution 1024 X 768 XGA 800 X 600 SVGA 640 x 480 VCA 320 X 240 QVGA lank less than 320 x 240 SPECIFICATIONS Display color type 65535 256 colors 16 colors Monochrome black and whi
106. T The cable for connection to the QCPU motion controller CPU Q series does not have a FG wire that needs to be grounded To connect QnACPU ACPU motion controller CPU A series and GOT When using GT15 CLJFXSS 1 or GT15 CLIBS ground the FC wires as shown in the figure below 1 GT15 COEXSS 1 Leave unconnected oo0000 GT15 COBS pasida 2SQ wire to the FG O terminals y LO to be 28 cm or less D Q Ground the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the GOT FG wires on GT15 CLIBS must be 28 cm or less 32 Leave the FG ground wire on GT15 EXCNB unconnected 4 Connect the FG wire on GT15 CLBS on the GOT side to the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the GOT Connect the FG wire on GT15 COBS on the PLC side to the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the PLC Connect the LG and FG terminals on the terminal block and provide a single grounding point for them 2 GT15 COBS For both GOTs provide the same grounding as described in the section 1 above to both GOTs 7 8 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS cable 8 OPTION 8 1 CF Card The CF card is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function Refer to the following for details K gt Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY A
107. T15 GOT 1000 GT11 Setting Changing the present value of the device System monitor of PLC the buffer memory monitor of monitor the test function and special memory and the O x O x buffer memory Ladder Displaying ladder monitor and executing hard O x x x monitor copy Changing PLC program of ACPU and A list editor O x O x parameters FX list E List editing PLC program of FX PLC O x O x editor Executing the monitor and data change for x Intelligent the buffer memory of intelligent function k module module on the dedicated screen O x x x 5 2 monitor Or monitoring available to check the signal aS status of I O module 3 Monitoring the network status of Network i MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 O x x x monitor MELSECNET II and MELSECNET B Q motion Servo monitor and parameter settings of the monitor motion controller CPU Q series O a E a Servo Executing each monitor function parameter amplifier change test operation and others of the O x x x monitor servo amplifier Executing the position display monitor equivalent to the display dedicated to CNC i MELDAS the alarm diagnosis monitor the O x x x monitor tool offset parameter the program monitor etc App 12 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function O Applicable X Not Applicatble Not required a ee GT Soft Drawing Z Setting items Function GT15 Comicon GT11 Setting e Z A drive
108. The following three types of operation can display the main menu Display the main menu after installing the Standard monitor OS from GT Designer2 to the GOT Flash memory Internal 1 When project data is undownloaded After the GOT is turned on a dialog box for notifying of absence of project data is displayed After the dialog box is displayed touch the OK button to display the main menu x aes Communication setting Fi re GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check T Touch the Ok button Language 2 When touching menu call key If you touch the menu call key while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility or GT Designer2 At factory shipment the GOT is set to Simultaneous 2 point presses on GOT screen upper right and upper left corners Menu call key Simultaneous 2 point touch Horizonal format Vertical format 5 Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check 1 Language Ix The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited 3 When touching special function switch utility If you touch the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The special function
109. UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 9 GOT Start Time 14 9 1 GOT start time function GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time Start time of GOT Current time of GOT Operating hours of GOT 14 9 2 Display operation of GOT start time Main menu Debug amp self check lt gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu S Pen i Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display c Program data control w Touch Debug amp self check GOT start time Debug self check Start time GOT Start Time Start Time 07 21 2006 FRI 15 35 22 Current Time 07 21 2006 FRI 16 12 09 Operating hours Oh 36m 45s 14 22 14 9 GOT Start Time 14 9 1 GOT start time function 14 9 3 Display of GOT start time Item Start Time Debug self check Start time x GOT Start Time Start Time 07 21 2006 FRI 15 35 22 07 21 2006 FRI 16 12 09 Current Time Operating hours Oh 36m 45s Description Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change Current Time Displays the current time Operating hours Point Remark Bs Displays operating hours of the GOT The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change
110. V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O Figure created as a part can be used to a 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x touch switch Data change switch can be used 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O Comment Group can be used 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O Touch switch Adjust Text Size setting is possible 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O Auto repeat can be used 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O The toutch switch on the ladder monitor 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O with device search function can be used PX Developer Function call is added to Switch Action of the special function 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 x O x switch Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 25 Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description x Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 O O xX figure FX List Monitor Operator Information Management Log in Log out Operator f Authentication Password Change Touch switch ree O O x Operator Authentication and Backup Restore are added to Switch Action of 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 the special function switch The name Password is changed to Password Security Level in Switch O O oO Action of th
111. W 3 6 gt SERIAL 00007201DP00001 A Pear 2 gt 4 DP Fue Np We MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC _ MADE IN JAPAN BootOS xig version oak adze Oxun ja Zz xt z a 5 A Ww x O W a O z Lu N e O Oo Zz 59 2y Za Hg oa 8 e u CS 2 592 eiga EOS 285 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 4 13 1 3 OS version confirmation 13 1 4 Display file The files that can be displayed in each screen are as follows Display Storage location Contents i screen Drive name folder name BootOS Built in flash memory C G1BOOT Standard monitor OS system screen data Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard monitor OS monitor functiony 1 Standard 6 x 8 dot font ASCII characters os monitor OS f i l 12 dot numerical HQ font information Z 16 dot numerical HQ font screen Built in flash memory C G1SYS TrueType numerical font 12 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Extended function OS Option OS Communication driver Project data User created screen data Project Comment data i ais 344 information Built in flash memory C PROJECT1 12 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic screen 16 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic TrueType Mincho Gothic Resource Alarm Standard CF card A Advanced alarm log file CSV file information data screen With GT Designer2 any folder name or file name can be specified 1 The 6 x 8 dot font 12 dot numerical HQ font 16
112. Wiring the power line and communication cable inside the duct Wiring duct Separator 7 6 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment If communication errors happen in synch with the on off signals from certain control equipment referred to as load hereafter such as no fuse breakers electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and z induction motors surge noise interference is suspected If this problem happens keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load i If that is not possible an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference O Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible Remedy for AC inductive load z E Keep the ground cable and communication cable away fi 2 from each other 26 nO L Load 2 Zz fe z AC Place the surge killer near the load 2 Output equipment such as PLC output unit G D Remedy for DC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away w from each other E L Load DC Place the surge killer near the load Output equipment such as PLC output unit i A O W Zz O S lt wn Z WIRING OPTION 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 7 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS cable To connect the QCPU motion controller CPU Q series and GO
113. X Moving logging file O x x x Changing logging file name O x x x Creating a new logging folder or file O x x x G10 CSV conversion Conversion from G1L of operation log file to CSV O 2 x 9 G10 TXT conversion Conversion from G10 of logging file to TXT O O x 2 Deletion of a operation log file or folder O O x x Operation log Copying of an operation log file O O x x information Moving of an operation log file O O x x Changing of an operation log file name O O x x Creating of a new operation log folder O O x x Displaying and searching of the list of operation logs O O X x Hard copy Deleting hard copy file O x x x information Copying hard copy file O xX x x Memory card Formatting memory card O x O x format Memory p Displaying the memory free space of GOT O x O x information Displaying the name data size and creating date O x x x of file or folder Special data Deleting special data file or folder O x x x information Special data file check O x x x Downloading special data of A drive Standard CF card to C drive Built in flash memory 9 r x a GOT data i Copies OS special data and project data to the package O x O x ae memory card acquisition Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES O Applicable x Not Applicatble Not required apase 3 GT Soft Drawing Setting items Function G
114. a 13 17 sre awe Copy Copies project data Enabled to copy only from the A drive to the A drive 13 18 95i Property display Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of GT Designer2 13 19 Data check Data check of the file can be executed 13 20 Downloads the project data written in the A drive Built in CF card to C drive Flash Download 13 21 Q memory 26a EO Uploads the project data written in the C drive Flash memory to the A drive Built in zsz Upload 13 23 a E CF card Oo aon 13 3 2 Display operation of project information oe Zz gt 4 Fug HEA Main menu Program Data control lt a i ane Ore gt Section 9 3 Utility Display oga OLN 3 Comunication sett ine i J 0s fate n setup Pa Alarm information 3 Time setting amp display Tm Project i gformat ion Program catag gntrol Debug amp self of Nenory card Forn Touch Program data control Project information alee NaN m AND BATTERY Project information Program Data Project information ma x Select drive 3 ae n f A Built in CF card L m N O oO Matar Flash Memory Select the drive and a operate project data file Internal SRAM A on ge gt z3 go Wo oa no O 0 O 5 5 O n See aoe Oz 22h 13 3 Project Information 13 14 13 3 1 Function of project information 13 3 3 Display example of project information Project information screen Project inform
115. a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect 2 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the displayscreen and increases the backlight life 3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Not compliant when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications e GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Specifications a Item GT1155 QSBD w GT1150 QLBD Serial interface RS422 compliant ich RS 492 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps A Connecter type D sub 9 pin female e Use PLC communication Serial interface RS232 compliant ich mi Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps 26 RS 232 Connecter type D sub 9 pin male 3 Use PLC communication barcode reader connection PC Built in communication project data upload download OS installation g Interface transparent function 2 Serial interface USB comp
116. able length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C30R21103 3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit 2 2 Component List 2 6 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 SYSTEM We OVERVIEW zZ O lt x a D Oo m zZ Q Oo SPECIFICATIONS EMC DIRECTIVE PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 7 Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs Sold separately Product ee Model name Description name GT09 C30R41201 6C Cable length 3 m RS 422 GT09 C100R41201 6C Cable length 10 m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable GT09 C200R41201 6C Cable length 20 m GT09 C300R41201 6C Cable length 30 m RS 232 gt bl GT09 C30R21201 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable Connection cables for SHARP PLCs Sold separately Product ae Model name Description name GT09 C30R40601 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C200R40601 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40601 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40602 15P Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40602 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C200R40602 15P_ Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40602 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40603 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40603 6T Cable length 10m r For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit GT09 C200R40603 6T Cable leng
117. aeeeeeseiaeeeeeenaes 7 8 SA CFCA eaa e Mn EOE E Ben pee tee SRO RRO MEM EU SAE Despair rene AEE rer 8 1 eME Applicable CE Cards ots attest te facettes tools oi raeten tte ct T A EE tat be ade oat aiede cased td oe 8 1 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF Card cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesnnaeeeseesieeeeeeseaees 8 2 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor i ieee eee a Ee a e e e gee aa aeea recente ae 8 4 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor c ccccccecceeeeeeeeceeeeceeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseceeecaecaeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeenisaeess 8 4 8 2 2 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory card adaptor c ce eeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 8 4 8 3 Option Function Board finden nediassbientterprtenseizat eel etiaca iar satininantabnta diver oetons 8 5 8 3 1 Applicable option function DOAIC ccececeeeeeccecceee aa aaa a Aaaa aea aea aiet 8 5 ECA eO aE aE EE E E AE E E E E ETE 8 5 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function DOAMC cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetesttinsneaeeees 8 6 oa A eTe I EATE EOE E A E T 8 8 8 4 1 Applicable battery mimis aiei be ee lated ere e etal ad eid deta ete ee 8 8 3 4 2 Battery SpecifiCAatiOns oeri s araa aa AA A AATA E U a RAIET T eat et adden 8 8 8 4 3 Battery replacement Procedure cecceccececeeeeeeeeeceecceneaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseesecceecuecaeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeteeniaaeess 8 8 8 5 Protective Sheet eects ost dearest alam lad aera ed bid oa i
118. age acquisition Zz O e ugi 5 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition 2 gt This function copies the following OSs that are installed on the GOT and the data to the memory card OS Boot OS Standard monitor OS Communication OS Extended function OS Option OS e Project data Copied data can be used as a backup or they can be installed on another GOT to create a GOT that has the same configuration Refer to the following section for the Installation function of the GOT Tu 30 K gt Section 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card aiz SE SEST 13 7 2 Operating the GOT data package acquisition function Q 25a 332 ate Main menu Program data control Sou 3 Section 9 3 Utility Display O Fie ard Forma wea lt n2 Touch the GOT data oak 7 GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition x GOT s OS project data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button a Sea em AND BATTERY Select Drive A Built in CF card GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 34 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition
119. alfunction If a communication error including cable disconnection occurs while monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative as described below 1 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Become inoperative 2 PLC CPU shuts down and the GOT becomes inoperative For the system configuration with GOT assuming communication error ocurrs in the GOT the switches for critical operation to the system should be set in the device other than GOT False output or malfunciton may occur Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED flickers green orange and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight
120. alled directly from the GT Designer2 ZS a ee is gt wiee eet 225 i Ee GT Designer BootOS or Standard monitor OS installation ies N lt x 2 GT Designer2 CF card GOT sas OS file BootOS or Standard Oo gt monitor OS installation VA OLN mini e When GOT is remote installed easily mag GOT using the CF card Gee fe a o Gee in 3 z GT Designer2 co lt z 3 GOT CF card GOT a OS file BootOS Standard ee Va upload monitor OS installation 7 0 aoe Install OS from GOT to GOT using CF card LO GOT gt nS GOT Install the CF CF card card in GOT g z O Refer to the following for the installation which uses GT Designer2 L O L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual al Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA K 5 Oo Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT L gt Chapter 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 6 E on ge oa qa Hg oa N ave O 5 5 ZoS BIR EOS Boe Zan 9 1 Utility Execution 9 1 9 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens Item Functions overview Setting of channel number for the communication interface and assignment of communication driver setting 1 Detail settings Communication Setting of communication parameter Sequence program protection key word setting When FX series PLC is connected Sequence program protection key word dele
121. amage of the screws or the GOT Securely connect the option function board to the connector provided for the board When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100 or less which is used exclusively for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign mat
122. an be 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x made on each object Parts Display When Bit Trigger is not met whether to Parts Movement j 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 O x figure Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O 4 Panelmeter Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Meter Attribute and Core can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O When Bit Trigger is not met whether to F Level 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Trend graph Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Function to collect data only when display i Line graph 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monit
123. and Internal SRAM Function A drive memory check Contents Checks whether the memory Standard CF card of the A drive can be read written normally C drive memory check Checks whether the memory Flash memory of the C drive can be read written normally D drive memory check Checks whether the memory Internal SRAM of the D drive can be read written normally 14 3 2 Display operation of memory check Main menu Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu N i Communication setting IEF cot setup Time setting amp display ca Program data control Ee Debug self check MR Touch Debug amp self check Debug amp self check Self check Debug amp self check Touch Memory check Memory check Debug self check Memory check be lect Drive D 14 4 14 3 Memory Check A Built in CF card C Flash Memory Internal SRAM Select the memory to check and touch Check 14 3 1 Memory check function 14 3 3 Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory Point gt When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following CF card inserting removing method lt gt Section 8 1 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arisen Replace the CF card or Flash memory C drive For details of Flash memory c
124. ard Section 8 1 CF Card 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor The following memory card adaptor is applicable Model Contents GT05 MEM ADPC Adaptor converting from CF card to memory card Type Il 8 2 2 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory card adaptor 8 4 Fit the CF card in the memory card adaptor Lf gt ZH LZ CF card Memory card adaptor 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor 8 3 Option Function Board GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD a To use the optional functions the option function board is necessary i For GT11 with hardware version C or later option function can be used without mounting the option function board Refer to the following for the functions requiring the option function board 2 O L gt GT Designer2 Versiong Screen Design Manual z o o F Point fP Checking method of hardware version 8 Confim the hardware version with the products rating plate 2 Ae MITSUBISHI 6 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL S MODEL GT1155 QSBD G IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX m SERIAL 540001 BC BG Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A Uy esse CE P ra lt GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA The above models of GOTs have built in option fu
125. as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 lt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 2 5 Clock Function Adjust and Broadcast can be used appropriately c H Adjust Broadcast ci Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 2 5 Clock Function None No adjustment of clock data Time Setting amp display Clock setting Adjust 02 01 2005 12 34 56 THU GOT internal battery Norma voltage status x With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK OK Cancel 12 2 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Clock setting operations If touch the setup item the setup contents is changed Adjust Broadcast AdjustBroadcast None If touch OK button the setup contents is reflected If touch X button without touching OK button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The time display and setting screen is displayed If touch X button GOT restarts After restart GOT operates with the changed settings P z Point P 1 When connecting with an external device which does not have clock function Z If set to Adjust or Broadc
126. ast for Clock setting while the GOT is connected with gt external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the clock data will not be adjusted Refer to the following for the list of PLC installed with clock function L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 2 4 3 PLC CPUs with clock function Su S520 2 Clock setting and battery Zune If Broadcast or None is selected for Clock setting the battery status of the en GOT is required to be normal Refer to 3 GOT internal battery voltage status to check the battery status 3 Operation setting by GT Designer2 2 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in System Environment of Zkz GT Designer2 puk To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the E2 setting at the display setting of GOT 12 L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup n f0 Z E LU n x O mi gt gt 93 ra E2 HAO To a gt fa Zin In FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 3 12 1 3 Clock setting operations Clock display 12 4 Carry out the display and setting of GOT clock data When setting the clock data change the clock data on the GOT and controller regardless of clock setting
127. ation of project information Data check operation Z Carrys out data check of the selected project file S Ww gt When data is normal Touch the button after Data romat selecting the file for data check 5 The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left 2 O If touch OK button the dialog is closed Tu Seo sie 824 If Data error is displayed the target file may be broken When dataiis erroneous Download the target file again i ZZ Data error Og E praf 28 Fuig WEG xas 30 E7 EDNA AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 3 Project Information 13 20 13 3 4 Operation of project information g Download Transfers the project data from the A drive Built in CF card to the C drive Flash Memory 13 21 Communicate with Memory Card Memory card write Boot OS write a Untitled Project1 M Base Screen Common settings Standard monitor OS C Communication driver Extended function OS s Option OS SETE Attention Project data is only valid for the supporting OS therefore it is recommend to write the correct version of the OS GOT type T11 0 320 240 Boot Drive E E Buitin Flash Memory Available size 6650339328 byte Project Data byte Memory card Cc C4 Download now 13 3 Project Infor
128. ation screen Storage file folder display screen Program Data Project information Program Data Project information E3 elect drive A i Built in CF card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Number Item Contents A The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected 1 Select drive p n When the CF card is not connected A Built in CF card is not displayed 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR Displays the name of file or folder saved in the selected drive or contained in the selected folder When the file or folder name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters 3 Name are not displayed If the displayed project data is a GOT monitoring target file mark precedes the file name If the displayed project data is currently selected to be displayed asterisk precedes the file name 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed 7 Size of the drive Displays the size in use size of the drive selected in Select drive Displays the execution switch of functions download upload etc which can be 8 Operation switch i DOES carried out in Project information 9 Number of fi
129. ause the error Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below When use the extension base unit QnASCPU Example 1 Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable IN side from the final stage GOT Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT If an error does not occur the final stage GOT may be faulty Example 2 Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable x OUT side from the GOT located one E stage before the final stage 7 __ v i me Turn on the power of the PLC v 7 1 i eee eg Turn on the power of the GOT 2 m Sax N N a N 1 If an error does not occur the final 7 r stage GOT and the bus connection i C FG cable before the final stage may be M 5 77 p faulty Siaina Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to locate error positions Point gt Notes on narrowing the error part range 1 When disconnecting the extension base units in order use only an END instruction for the sequence program and any error resulting from the sequence program will not occur and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained easily 2 When the frequency of occurrenc
130. ay BOX the screen switches to the Detailed setting screen of the related communication device C7 Section 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 8 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting 10 2 Communication Detail Settings Zz O z 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions md Function Contents 5 Communication Set various communication parameters of communication devices 1 0 parameters setting The settable parameters differ according to the communication device 5 fe Keyword Register For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set F Ow Keyword Delete For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted Zgo re Keyword Clear For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled ain OSN For the FX series PLCs with the 2nd keyword in use the cancelled program protection in the Keyword Protect PLC can be reactivated Q 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation Zkz Tu 28 Touch the driver display BOX of the communication parameter to be set in the Communication setting reen scree 2 z B i zA Communication Setting Emig moe Standard I F Setting Deo OBE ode Of5 a Z lt CH Driver assign f a wo Definition of ChNo O None TO LFA device 8 Barcode 9 PC x The screen switches to the Communica
131. ble E For connecting FA CNV O CBL and GOT link P GT01 C200R4 25P 20m For connecting serial communication unit i AJ71QC24 N R4 and GOT connection a GT01 C300R4 25P 30m cable Z Zz i a Computer GT09 C30R4 6C 3m lt link GT09 C100R4 6C 10m For connecting computer link unit serial connection GTO09 C200R4 6C 20m communication unit and GOT calle GT09 C300R4 6C 30m gt QCPU D direct For connecting QCPU Motion controller CPU Q A GT01 C30R2 6P 3m Z connection series and GOT cable FX expansion board 6 S For connecting FXCPU expansion board D sub E connection F al 9pins special adapter D sub 9 pins and GOT Zz FX special D GT01 C30R2 9S 3m For connecting personal computer GT Z adaptor Z RS 232 Designer2 D sub 9 pins female and GOT Cane connection tahoe le data D sub 9 pins female transfer cable FX special p Z For connecting FXCPU special adaptor D sub Y adaptor GT01 C30R2 25P 3m 25 pins and GOT connection C t vomputer ST09 C30R2 9P 3m l ree link For connecting computer link unit serial connection communication unit and GOT GT09 C30R2 25P 3m cable z O 4 Description in parentheses indicates the cable side connector shape e 2 2 Component List 2 4 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Bus cable for connection to QCPU Q mode Sold separately Product name Q add on cable Inter GOT connection cable Model name GT15 QC06B Cable length 0 6m GT
132. c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeees 18 7 18 3 Locating error POSITIONS cerrar anaE TE A AARAL a ATEREA ETAETA AR ORR EA 18 7 18 3 2 Further locating error positions saassseaseeesineseenrrisnnnnesiiinaneetennnasannnndsnnnnnaaatdnaaaatanineananaddanannae 18 8 A 12 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting c ccceccecceeeeeeeee eee ceecaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseseeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 18 9 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring scr ccsceescoresieesieceddenteuBdeti att wendecedeqvutbvesivedeands teeta 18 10 18 5 Stating CO Tee e A eee ates ae teenth EER e Ee EEE aE 18 11 18 9 f POVE Of a a a a aa aaa aa bal a aa aa aa aaa aat 18 11 18 5 2 Communication from GT Designer2 to the GOT sssssssssssssrrssssrrrrssrrrrrsssttrrsssttnrsssttenrsssrennnnt 18 11 APPENDICES icici iccdersterie een eat edat he App 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions su sesace8 sesecgsesssaensyasaess pent cauaveansevesaeesisaueusacanavexconeens App 1 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes App 8 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions ccccccccccccscceeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaees App 14 Appendix 3 1 Relevant Models c eccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesenaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeennsaees App 14 Appendix 3 2 Transport Quideline S ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeesenaees App 14 Appendix 4 List
133. cation driver 2 43V O x x GT Designer2 MELSECNET H 03 01 Supporting connection to CC Link CC Link Intelligence device station Communication driver 2 09K ax O x x connection Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK ID 01 02 Intelligent device Q173HCPU station S di donto CCInkYs2 292 Communication driver upporting connection to CC Link Ver pp j CC Link Ver2 ID 03 00 O O x Supporting connection to CC Link Via CC Link are i i G4 Communication driver connection Via 2 09K 7 O lt O G4 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK G4 01 02 Q173HCPU Supporting connection to the Ethernet Communication driver O Supporting connection to Q172HCPU 2 09K QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Oo x Q173HCPU 01 02 x Ethernet connection Supporting automatic system switching 2 32 Communication driver o o X for QCPU redundant system QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 00 Supporting routing parameter setting with Communication driver i 2 43V O O x GT Designer2 QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 01 Extended device range monitored Communication driver The setting of TIM or CNT up to 4095 2 09K OMRON SYSMAC O O O etc 01 02 OMRON PLC Communication driver connection Supporting delay time setting 2 27D OMRON SYSMAC O x O 02 04 Supporting the settings of Retry and Communication driver i 2 43V O x O Timeout Time OMRON SYSMAC 03 01 KEYENCE PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 18U O x O connection KEYEN
134. cecceeeeeeteeeeeeeteneeeeeeeteteeeeeeeteeeeeeeetnteeeeeeeas 5 5 6 INSTALLATION h ionnan atauina eieaa amea Cocco OMT 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 2 6 2 Panel Cutting DIMENSIONS essee r eeen era neiere at ush ues Gceubdendeueestudtades heeeestewee 6 4 6 3 Mounting POSIION e e tants e e a e ete Saeki ese ect T ae daaa 6 4 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 6 5 Installation Procedure 24 222 et eer ed eet eh Gennes edad aids Setar chy halal begs vyerseheel bee aot aces 6 6 1 1 Power Supply Wining sergen ais tnt ee a toe iach els a a a 7 2 LAA NVIPING OXAM PIC a ides cseetetetebeltcg sacks heteaak temlane sets iene deck tant ceeaeh toed toed toda T T 7 2 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring REMEdY ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeetiaeeeeesenaaees 7 3 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 2 2 cccccseceeeeeteseseeseeeeeeesegeceececccecceeneeeeeeeeeeente 7 6 T21 Wining iNSIde arseenin ae anid eta aden te ec een et eed 7 6 2 2 Outside the panels ora aa te piss asc acai ena abe de saa te gases dat aaa pease aeaaea aA eee naa d daaa 7 6 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to Control equipment 0 0 0 eee eee eect ee eee eetteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeetaeeeeeeeetaeeeeenaaees 7 7 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS Cable 0 0 ecceeeee scene terse enne tees ee eaeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeen
135. clock data 12 4 GOT internal battery voltage i i Displays GOT internal battery voltage status 12 5 status 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting Main menu Time setting amp display ILF Section 9 3 Utility Display eee Time Setting amp display Clock setting Adjust Time setting amp display Set the Clock settings GOT internal battery Norma voltage status 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions 02 01 2005 12 34 56 and Time settings 12 1 Z O oO Z m E e z O Sw 50 Z Se SE e O5 u 020 Q Zz LOR zsz Tu Mow aon n ONE Z gt FEA eA DEO xng Sok oss O lt FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 12 1 3 Clock setting operations Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT data and the clock data of PLC CPU connected with GOT Setting Contents Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of PLC CPU Adjust Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 lt L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 2 5 Clock Function Adjust the time of PLC CPU clock data to the clock data of GOT Broadcast Same
136. confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the
137. correct Write p operation i write All Protect Write write ai Protect cancelled prohibition 4 prohibition prohibition protection Device monitoring O Oo O x O O Oo Device change 3 T C setting values and file register x x x x O Oo O from D1000 Other than the above Difference between All Protect and All operation prohibition When All Protect is selected both device display and input by the programming tool or GOT are prohibited When All operation prohibition is selected device display and input are possible although operations by the programming tool are all prohibited 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Delete Registered keyword is deleted D Touching the Delete key pops up a keyboard for keyword input When the correct keyword is input and the key is touched the keyword is deleted an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Please input keyword w z ra a wi Z Zz O i 9 Site ZYE E Eiu Ofn DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Target PLC Settings FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted Input a keyword to be deleted only into keyword 1 FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword 2nd keyword is ignored 4 Refer to the manual for the PLC in use for the models that are compatible with the 2nd
138. creen 2 When Communication Settings has not been downloaded using GT Designer2 GT1155 QSBD and GT1155 QLBD only When Communication Settings has not been downloaded the GOT automatically assigns the installed communication driver as the RS422 interface When multiple communication drivers are installed the GOT automatically assigns the first installed communication driver to the RS422 interface To assign the communication driver to the RS 232 interface or to change the already assigned communication driver change the settings in the Communication Settings of the utility screen or in the Communication Settings of GT Designer2 On the unit that only allows a bus connection the installed bus communication driver is assigned to the bus interface a After automatic assignment an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Zz O x 9 Zz Q Oo LO LZ ita Wu LU Zn If the OK button is clicked to store the settings in the GOT after automatic assignment the automatic assignment will not be executed from the next startup b Priority of Communication Settings of GT Designer2 25x When Communication Settings is downloaded to the GOT from GT ae Designer2 after automatic assignment the GOT will operate according to the tole Communication Settings of GT Designer2 N 2 EFKA peg VETT ey oak OZ a Z lt x z 5 o gt wo 20 LO x O W ae O u p k O oO Zz O o On ah oa
139. ct check channel 0 R8282 set CPU communication check Executing now CPU communication check No error o CPU communication check Error The following cause Connection error H W error parameter setting error ox 14 7 I O Check 14 7 3 I O check operation As a preparatory step for the CPU communication check perform the following items e Installing Communication driver Use GT Designer2 to install e Setting Communication settings Use GT Designer2 to enter and download e Connecting connection device Connect a PLC to the communication interface for which the CPU communication check is applied in order to start the communication Check for the power is on or if any error occurred If touch the cPuU button the CPU communication check is carried out After the CPU communication starts normally the dialog mentioned left notifying that it is on checking until the CPU communication check ends normally When the CPU communication check ends its result is notified by dialog If the CPU communication check ends normally the dialog notifying of the normal termination mentioned left is displayed If touch the button in the dialog after confirming the result returns to I O check If the dialog mentioned left is displayed after selecting or during CPU communication check confirm the following e No misconnection with CPU GOT1000 Series Connection Manual e No har
140. ct name Model Contents CONFIGURATION SYSTEM USB environmental Environmental protection cover for USB interface on the main unit front GT11 50UCOV protection cover panel conforming to IP67 8 6 2 Installing procedure SPECIFICATIONS Turn the GOT power off 2 Disconnect the USB cable from the GOT if one is connected Open the USB environmental protection cover equipped with the GOT and remove the mounting screws 4 Remove the old USB environmental protection cover from the GOT to replace it with the new USB environmental protection cover PART NAME USB environmental Fix the new USB environmental protection cover while fitting its protection cover projection to the hole in the GOT and mount the cover to the GOT using Projection the mounting screws Tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48N m for both mounting screws A and B O Mounting screw B EMC DIRECTIVE Mounting screw A M3 x 6 pan head screw INSTALLATION Point gt Precautions when the USB environmental protection cover is opened Environmental protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is opened 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 11 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover 8 7 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily 8 7 1 Applicable stand
141. cted such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States Other company and product names herein may be either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT1oo00 GT11 User s Manual MODEL GT11 U E MOREL 09R815 JY997D17501D sa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HI
142. ctive sheet for 5 7 GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets 8 5 2 Installing procedure 0 If the protective sheet has been already attached to the GOT remove the old one from the GOT display section holding the lower right corner If the protective sheet for transportation is attached to the GOT remove it too D Peel the release paper from the back of the new protective sheet and attach its adhesive side to the GOT display section When attaching the protective sheet make sure to fit iton the display section closely without leaving any clearance between them Remark Replacement time of protective sheet A Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly 8 10 8 5 Protective Sheet 8 5 1 Applicable protective sheet 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environmental protection cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil The GOT is installed with the USB environmental protection cover at factory shipment Replace when damage and deterioration are caused OVERVIEW 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT1100 Produ
143. d and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it The battery may be damaged by the drop or impact Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery periodically For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen and backlight please consult your nearest sales office or FA center For the battery life refer to the following L Section 3 4 Power Supply Specifications For the life of the LCD screen or backlight refer to the following lt gt Section 3 2 Performance Specifications 17 1 7 17 1 Daily Inspection Q z lt W 6 Zz lt zZ W lt Daily inspection items g oO Inspection i mt No Inspection Item Method Criterion Action 5 1 GOT mounting status Check for loose Securely mounted Retighten screws within the mounting screws spec
144. d out for files Function Contents Reference page Information display of files and fold Displays name data size creation date and time of file or folder 13 25 13 26 olders Deletion Deletes file 13 27 Copy Copys file 13 28 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information Main menu Program Data control Section 9 3 Utility Display 5 Communication setting GOT setup Time settirg amp display Program dataggontrol Debug amp self oR Touch a 0S information Pa Alarm infgrmat jon Program data control Alarm information Program Data Alarm information Belect drive C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM aj Henry card Forms Alarm information A Built in CF card Select a drive and operate alarm log file 13 4 Alarm Information 13 24 13 4 1 Function of alarm information UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS EDNA AND BATTERY st STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information Alarm information screen Program Data Alarm information Belect drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Number Item 1 Select drive Alarm information Storage file folder display screen Pr ogram Da
145. dot numerical HQ font are displayed as Standard monitor OS 2 The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data 3 Each folder is created automatically at installation download and upload of each file 4 The folder name and file name can be set at System Setting in System Environment of GT Designer2 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 1 GOT PLC Type Setting 13 5 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 4 Display file 13 2 OS Information Zz O 2 13 2 1 Function of OS information 2 Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS PC communication driver and Option 5 OS by which each drive A Built in CF card C Flash memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible 2 Function Contents Reference page O Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 13 8 13 9 Sw zO All files written in the A drive Built in CF card can be installed in the C drive Flash Bez Install 13 10 Sur memory ry Zi All files in the C drive Flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in CF Upload 13 11 card f Displays the property file name data size type version and creation date of the Property display i 13 12 file a 2 Data check Data check of files is possible 13 13 SEO ABE Dany
146. dware error C GOT1000 Series Connection Manual e No missettings of parameter lt Section 10 2 Communication Detail Settings If touch the OK button in the dialog after confirming the result returns to I O check Self loopback Ox Display unit back RS 232 RS232 communication check rror The following cause Connection error H W error parameter setting error Restart CPU communication check Executing now CPU communication check No error Restart RS232 communication check Error Verify 4 BYTE Restart D For preparation for the self loopback communication check insert the connector for self loopback check Customer purchased shown in the diagram left in the RS 232 interface For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins 4 and 6 pins respectively If touch the button the hardware check for the RS 232 interface is carried out After selecting Seif the transferred data and received data are verified through the self loopback connector If data can not be received during data transmission the dialog shown left is displayed which notifies the self loopback connector failure self loopback connector communication error or RS 232 interface hardware failure 4 During check the dialog shown left is displayed When all checks end normally the dialog shown left is displayed and the GOT resta
147. e zes Q zZ lt n oO e jo a 16 5 CoreOS 16 13 16 5 2 When CoreOS cannot be installed 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hol
148. e mounting angles shown above Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C 6 5 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 5 Installation Procedure The GOT is designed to be embedded into a panel Mount the GOT by following the procedure below For panel cutting dimensions refer to Section 6 2 Note that the panel thickness should be within 5mm OVERVIEW Installing the packing Packing 1 GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD Install packing to the packing installation groove on the back panel of the GOT While referring to the cross sectional view of the packing shown right push the thinner side into the packing groove Right drawing is the example of lateral format CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Packing installation groove 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA and GT1150 QLBDA Units are shipped with the packing attached Packing cross sectional view SPECIFICATIONS 4 Inserting direction Inserting into the panel face Insert the GOT from the front side of the panel PART NAME fer EMC DIRECTIVE Mounting hole Zz 4 pi z n z WIRING OPTION 6 5 Installation Procedure 6 6 Fixing the GOT Engage the hook of the mounting fitting accessory to the unit fixing hole of the GOT and tighten the screw until the GOT is fixed with the mounting bolt accessory The GOT will be fixed in
149. e next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 6 1 Touch panel check function Touch panel check is a function which checks whether there is no dead zone area in touch key minimum unit 16 dots x 16 dots 14 6 2 Display operation of touch panel check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt Section 9 3 Utility Display Debug amp self check SI Communication setting re GOT setup EA Time setting amp display ca Program data control rE Debu self check Touch Debug amp Self check Touch panel check Starting the touch panel check Touching Touch panel check in the Self check displays the screen describing the touch panel check operation Touch the button in the description screen to start the touch panel check Point gt Notes on Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 15 14 6 1 Touch panel check function COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF
150. e of an error is low check the error by taking a rather long time with the modules disconnected The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis operation is caused by noise 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 8 18 3 2 Further locating error positions m MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Ww 0 1 gs ee Zy T o Xz wc X lt L lt APPENDICES 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting Taking the following system as an example troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred When QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used PLC main base unit GOT 1 GOT 2 Extension cable z Bus connection Bus connection cable cable Y Check the error code step appearing on the PLC CPU Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs The SP UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU Y Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Y Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on PLC CPU Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Y Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2 at IN side to further locate the error positions Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on the GOT 2 bus connection unit
151. e special function switch Setting to display input value when entering the value at input target object 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x xX Numerical Display position is possible Numerical input Format String setting is possible 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O When Bit Trigger is not met whether to N 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O enable Hold Display can be selected Function to store NULL 0x00 at the end 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O of input characters Standard monitor OS 02 02 2 18U Option OS O O x KANA KANJI JP 02 02 Function to convert characters input in Kana into Kanji ASCII Display ASCII Input Alignment setting is added 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O Setting for displaying an input value at the i aes 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O input target object position is possible When Bit Trigger is not met whether to R 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O G enable Hold Display can be selected When Bit Trigger is not met whether to Data List i 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O enable Hold Display can be selected When Bit Trigger is not met whether to Comment Display i 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O enable Hold Display can be selected Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O G O Use
152. ectric potential difference and noise interference which may result in GOT malfunctions These problems may be resolved by taking the following measures Wiring path of the GOT s ground cable and power line Bundling the GOT s ground cable and power line together can cause interference noise which may result in malfunctions Keeping the GOT s ground cable and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference es INSTALLATION WIRING Power supply for power equipment Power supply for power equipment Good Wiring the ground cable away from the Bad Bundling the ground cable and E power cable the power cable E 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 3 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the 7 4 panel to which the GOT is grounded When running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a sequencer to the panel to which the GOT is grounded the ground cable may have to be directly connected to the terminal on the GOT Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment If electric potential difference between the ground points created by it causes malfunctions lowering the voltage as shown in Remedy 1 below may solve the problem 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy e Remedy 1
153. ed from GOT setup In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set Screen Description Reference page Opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight language battery alarm display 11 1 3 Setting screen for display invert colors 2 Brightness contrast 11 8 Sw Buzzer volume window move buzzer 11 12 5x9 Setting screen for 2ra j Security setting 11 12 EE operation 9zW Utility call key 11 12 Se 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions fa Zz Zon gt sz Qi Ooty aon Setting regarding display is possible The items which can be set are shown below Items Contents Setting range 2 2 The title display period at the main unit boot can be 0 to 60 seconds 1 Z gt 5 Opening screen time Fig set lt At factory shipment 5 seconds gt wea LH 0 to 60 minutes 505 The period from the user stops the touch panel i oak y we lt At factory shipment 0 minutes gt IZE Screen save time operation till the screen save function starts can be OLN t When set to 0 the function becomes set invalid Whether turn ON or OFF the backlight simultaneously ON OFF Q Screen save backlight a Z at the screen save function start can be specified lt At factory shipment OFF gt Eas Japanese D D gt wA oul English zo Confirmation of the current language and switching s x pZ Chi Simplif
154. ed to be connected between the 2 public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises o Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 4 This index indicates the degree to which conductive pollution is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation Zz x Zz O e oO fe 3 1 General Specifications 3 1 3 2 Performance Specifications e GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD re Specifications GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Type STN color liquid crystal STN monochrome white black liquid crystal Screen size 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240 dots Display size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format Display character 16 dot standard font 20 characters X 15 lines 12 dot standard font 26 characters X 20 lines Horizontal format Display Display color 256 colors Monochrome white black 16 scales section Display anale Left Right 50 degrees Top 50 degrees Left Right 45 degrees Top 20 degrees p ay ang Bottom 60 degrees Horizontal format Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format Contrast adjustment 16 level adjustment Intensity of LCD only 350 cd m Ad
155. eeeeeeecteceaeceeeeeeeeneess 13 34 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition cccccceeeeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeetnaeeaeeeeeeeeeess 13 35 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition Operation c ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeseesecsaesaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 36 NA Me OSD UG si sass incStyusts eee vies A E T exten Sewcanesusd tenets E S 14 1 14 1 1 Debug functions 2 cc2c ietii diac riiceiit edie eet ede dened tind AA EAN A ER AA 14 1 14 1 2 Display operation Of debug ee cieeeeneeeeeennee eee eeeae tees eeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeesedeaeeeeseeeiaeeeeeeeiaeeeeseeiaaes 14 2 e 2 SEI GMCGK E E E E taille ce ak ev seco hg 14 3 14 2 1 Self CHECK function eisean A es ect ba a eke EN an ee a tain Sa es eae 14 3 14 3 Memory COCK acca coach 2 SSeS hae eee oak sooo doal ponte eens Ate tae 14 4 14 3 1 Memory check function esni o rearea EKAA EEE EENKEER area BAE IARAA EADE EAR EIE ETIE RT 14 4 14 3 2 Display operation of memory CHECK ce eeeeeceeceeeeee eee eeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaaes 14 4 14 3 3 Memory check opara ON sioi oaa EAE ENA A TT EE ET 14 5 AA Drawa O NO Ok e ceca ved E E E E a a E a 14 8 14 4 1 Drawing check TUNGUM ineen a Aaaa iaaa i eta aeaa TE A AE 14 8 14 4 2 Display operation of drawing check cece eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeiaeeeseeenaaes 14 8 14 4 3 Display and operation of drawing check ccccccceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeteedaeeeee
156. eeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaes 16 5 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 2 0 eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 16 6 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 8 NO ro COLEUS EE EA E E E E aloha saben aes eemtons 16 11 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS eee eeeceee eee enteee eee ecne eee teen anaes eee taaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 16 11 16 5 2 When CoreOS cannot be installed cece eee ernes cette enter eee eaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 16 13 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 1 2 Daily INSPOCUOM EEEE AA crac AS EAEE EEE E E ab 17 2 172 PenOdic INSPEGCUON m a a e a D a 17 2 17 3 Gleaning Methodi iz ieee eee erete aae e eieaa EERE EN aea se 17 3 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement eeeeeeeees 17 4 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection sacecssserersceniavertinceds eechaccta eee w devigeieneon ee eee 17 6 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm cc cceeeecceee eee eecne eset eeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaees 17 6 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 18 1 18 1 Error Contents Display siscdlaciectacars cone dng danke Saceeadend dans died savesicaune dnd Matec ncetisedoewadnaas 18 1 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 18 3 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection cc
157. eeenaeeeeeeeeiaeeeeenenaees 14 9 AAS FONE CHOC Keioc craves cite EEE LEA A AA E ddacedanparcnineuata toantipteve 14 13 14 5 T FONGENECK TUNCHON ics cece saaz edestestadecett ade acdaee ae gtedi ag dahl par aaa Madi cous bah aie aaa i 14 13 14 5 2 Display operation of font ChECK cececceceeccnecceeceeeeeeeeteececeeeaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeesececceaaseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 13 1493 Fontscheck operationis 220 lt Mionuls teh etiea sete aearedand a eluant acer Reh ein eaten agai 14 14 14 6 Touch Parvel GHEEK neea casket eas e aaa guen nds wlaachasens tases EE E n tetee 14 15 14 6 1 Touch panel Check FUNCTION 2 0 20 cece cee cece eee eeeeceeae cae eeeeeeeeeeeceaaaaaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenecccuaeeeeesereees 14 15 14 6 2 Display operation of touch panel check ccceeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeesteeesnsaeess 14 15 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations c ccceccecceceeceeeeeeceeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseesaaaaeaaececeeeeeeeeeseesecsusaeeeeees 14 16 14A TVO CNE kenaa a a a a EA E nia ete 14 17 14 757 O Check TUMCUON en a ee acta E a a A ee 14 17 14 7 2 Display operation of I O CHECK ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeeeee se caaecaeceeeeeeeeeseesecsensassaeeeeeeeeees 14 17 14 7 3 VO check operationis sesi itanta eataa taae ie a a ne a aaae aae aaa Aa a Aae Da Laaa ETA I Paapa ERS 14 18 14 8 System Alarm Display nnnnnnnnnneeeeeeeeeeeaeenrnr nnt tt tt ntttntteennnnnnnnr rtt trtertreennnnnnn ennnen 14
158. etting COMMUNICATION MEY INTERFACE MEW SETTING fa Zz Tow gt sz Qi Ooty OON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY DISPLAY SECTION GOT SELF CHECK STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 1 3 Display setting operations Opening screen time screen save time 11 4 GOT setup Display Language English Opening screen time Screen save time Screen save backlight Battery alarm display GOT setup Display Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON Brightness contrast Setting Ye With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK OK Cance 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations Q If touching the setting time numerical keyboard is displayed Input numeric with the keyboard Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched If X button is touched without touching OK button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed 4 If cl
159. f all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option function board on to from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board or battery or operating the reset switch wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity The static electricity can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Securely connect the option function board to the connector provided for the board When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do
160. f radiated noise or 50 mm 1 97 80 mm 3 14 50 mm 1 97 100 mm 3 93 o heat generating equipment nearby or more or more or more 2 100 mm 3 93 or more w In the absence of radiated noise or 20 mm 0 79 20 mm 0 79 20 mm 0 79 or morg 20 mm 0 79 6 heat generating equipment nearby or more or more or more or more 1 Vertical Format 50 mm 1 97 or more 20 mm 0 79 or more z 2 Horizontal Forma 80 mm 3 14 or more 20 mm 0 79 or more 2 S x 2 Z a i N C D E KP gt l lt gt lt _ Z lt Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16inch ptt z O e oO O 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar fixture set the GOT display section as shown below Horizontal installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT back panel GOT display section e Control panel etc e The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C Vertical installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 50 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT back panel GOT display section Control panel etc e The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within th
161. f touch Property display operation Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the dialog mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder OK button starts to copy Cancel button cancels to copy Q When copying completes the dialog of completion is displayed OK button closes the dialog eae cont 2 Property If touch button after selecting the ate Us ULNOF 3 g Drawing S W version GT Designer Version project data to display the property the B 1 Title Screen 2 property is displayed as shown left B 15 Operation B 16 Display Screen i i property display the following B 32767 Operation information is displayed Item Contents Date Displays the creation date of the file Author Displays the author of the project data 7 Drawing Displays name and version of the drawing S W software by which the project data is version 2 If touch created A button the screen scrolls up down line by line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 4 If touch X button the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen 13 19 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Oper
162. fer to the following 2x Fug K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transmission Manual GEO x 8 TRANSFERRING DATA FE OH Point gt CoreOS ees a Section 16 1 to 16 4 of this chapter describes BootOS and Standard monitor OS Z only 3 For CoreOS refer to the following EN wo lt gt Section 16 5 CoreOS TS x O W ae O u g e O Oo Zz fe 59 On ih 3a im je zZ 9 wi ie n O x fo Ea oS lt P Re Og oF an 16 1 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location Required for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT Installed at factory shipment Flash memory BootOS BootOS can be installed from GT Designer2 or the CF card When installed C G1BOOT from GT Designer2 or the CF card GOT is initialized to be the factory shipment f status Standard monitor OS Required for display and System Screen Data operation of the user created screen and utility screen System Screen Information Not installed in GOT at factory Standard 3 shipment Flash memory monitor TrueType numerical font Os Install it from GT Designer2 or C G1SYS 12 dot Standard Font Gothic 16 dot Standard Font Mincho 16 dot Standard Font Gothic the CF card At installation select Mincho or Got
163. fied torque range 2 Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction 2 Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT S Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT g Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction 2 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting Z and terminal screws in the specified torque range 2 Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction n Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit This chapter describes the wiring to the GOT power supply section 1 For the connection with a PLC refer to the following gt C GOT1000 Series Connection Manual y Q 2 For the dimensional drawing of connection cables refer to the following 2 lt gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions gt Remark General preventive measures against noise T i There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and 2 Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines S Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to lt the following 3 points 2 1 Protecting against noise 7 a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high power drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated
164. fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it The battery may be damaged by the drop or impact Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body
165. functions ae Version of GT Item Description j Version of OS GT1020 GT1030 Designer2 ASCII input The ASCII input can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 O The statistics bar graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 O Graph The statistics pie graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 Oo Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 33 INDEX A Adist editor nioa eaaa EN 14 1 B Backlight shutoff detection 17 6 Bah COd Csi xed unna aa a 2 1 2 11 Battery asie innit ee etl 4 2 8 8 17 4 BOOtOS ish ivi iesiiieaatiediteeneetiesctaee dances 9 1 13 2 16 2 Brightness contrast adjustment 0e 11 8 Brightness contrast adjustment of display 11 8 Buzzer volume Setting ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 10 C CF card Compact Flash card E PEPEE A TAE E 2 9 8 1 9 1 13 2 16 1 Gl nan ie lie ner dee ae 15 1 Cleaning of display ceeeseeteereeeeeeee 15 1 17 3 Clock SEINS niaaa a 12 1 Communication settings screen seses 10 2 Component liSt ceeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 2 2 D Daily inspection censa uiia TA 17 2 Debug amp self check eseeeesrrecerrsnsrrrreserrrrrees 14 1 DISPlay cic r A E EA E eats 14 23 Display of OS information cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 6 Display of utility screen aeeeeeeneeeerreeserneeenns 9 6 Display Settin
166. g CF Card 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on Zz e The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of Standard monitor OS When S the screen requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen z E Operation procedure 5 amp Power OFF GOT and CF card access switch Insert the CF card in which 6 BootOS Standard monitor OS or project Su Zz data is stored in the CF card interface of gte GOT Su 020 Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT Q Power ON the GOT touching the upper and 25x lower left corners of the GOT screen asz OWT OON 8 Era HUD WEG gee BootOS and Standard monitor OS are pan Boot 05 4 Ak installed in the built in Flash memory Now installing Boo The CF card access LED is lit during lt installation Do not pull out the CF card or power off the ae GOT while the CF card access LED is lit 5 x O T O 4 GOT restarts automatically after installation D GOT tLe LET is completed When Standard monitor OS is already installed touch the OK button to reboot the GOT 2 on After confirming that GOT restarted Z normally switch OFF the CF card access g switch of GOT es 1 Confirm the CF card access LED is extinguished remove the CF card from the CF interface of GOT i je zZ 9 wi i n O x fo Ea oS l
167. gS inira keel e s aa 11 1 Displann teeter enh 14 20 E Error iStore rate yaaa aaa Are anah 18 3 Error message and solution 18 3 External dimensions cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 1 F F atures ais e e ere east aetiedl 1 4 G General specifications cccccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 3 1 GOT data package acquisition 05 13 34 GOT Set Up schececetelag a a a aaa 11 1 GOT Start Time a T T 14 22 1 Installation 24 2 ts ethene eerie ed 6 1 Invert COIOMS iiia krae eaaet 11 7 L List of error code and error massage 06 18 3 Index 1 M Message indicator eieeeeeerrneeerirnessrrrreerens 18 3 O Operation setting eee eeeeteeeeeetteeeeeeeeee 11 11 QOptlOn ces cts ee ee ets 2 4 8 1 Option function board 0 0 ceeeeeseeeeeeeeees 2 1 8 5 OS filelist aoe ede are adidas 13 5 16 2 OS file storage location 0 ceee 13 1 16 2 OS installation 0 cccccccecseeeeeeceeee eens 9 1 13 1 16 2 Overall Configuration cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 2 1 P Panel cutting dimensions 6 4 Patt names teinien agin eae anal 4 1 PaSSWOMG i a e ieee Ade de es Sie 9 7 PC connection Cable ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Performance specifications cccccceeeeeeeeee 3 2 Periodic inSpection ceceeceeceeeeeeeteeeeteees 17 2 Power supply specifications cccceeeeeeeee 3 6 Program data Control
168. gh frequency Electrical shock prevention In order to such as the operators from electric shocks the control box must have the following functions a The control cabinet must be equipped with a lock so that only skilled or qualified personnel b The control cabinet must be fitted with advice which automatically stops the power supply when the cabinet is opened Dustproof and waterproof features The control box also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in our GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollution level 2 or better Pollution level 1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level 2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control box equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 5 1 2 Control cabinet Pollution level 3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level 4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment 5 1 3 Grounding It is
169. h X button the screen is closed GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 4 Alarm Information 13 26 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Deletion operation Deletes selected files Delete file name ALARMHST CSV Delete now Delete is completed 13 27 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Touch and select the file to delete If touch Del button the dialog mentioned left is d isplayed Confirm deletion targeted file is specified correctl If touch If touch y OK button the file is deleted Cancel button the deletion is canceled When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Copy operation Z Copies the selected file S rd gt ce Touch and select the file to copy B Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive If touch Copy button the message Prosram Data Alarm information Please select a destination is displayed Belect drive z in the left bottom of the screen A Built in CF card Tu Touch the drive name display area to select RO a drive and then touch the Next button SmE C Flash Memory The dialog for selecting a copy destination cag D Internal SRAM folder is displayed as shown left Q PI lect ZS case Sele Next Cancel ZEO
170. he security level which is set in GT Designer2 11 14 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions 11 4 3 Security level change operation Password input operation Q Security level change E3 Security level change success Password error amp By touching o to 9 A to F key the password of the changed security level is input When correcting the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and input the password again After inputting password touch the Enter key When the password matches a message notify ing successful change of the security level is displayed When the password does not match an error message is displayed 4 If OK button is touched it returns to the password input screen again Oi X button is touched it returns to security setting screen Remark About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return the security level to the original level 11 4 Security Level Change 11 15 11 4 3 Security level change operation COMMUNICATION MEY INTERFACE MEY SETTING fa Zz Zoo gt sz Qi Ooty OON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND
171. he utility screen has options for Brightness contrast Memory check etc and the format is horizontal only EMC DIRECTIVE For details refer to the following K gt Chapter 9 to Chapter 15 INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION About Manual The following manuals related to GOT 1000 series are available Refer to each manual in accordance with the intended use 1 Installation of the software programs Drawing Data transfer For operations from creating project data to transferring data to GOT refer to the following manuals GT Designer2 Version Purpose Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Installing product on PC ee Detailed Creating projects Creating screens aS Detailed Gla SS Detailed Drawing figures aes Detailed Making Common Settings Detailed Placing Setting objects gt Overview SEZ Overview Detailed Transferring data to GOT aoe EA Detailed 1 Stored in the GT Works 2 GT Designer2 in PDF format 2 Installing a GOT connection to a PLC For the operations from installing a GOT to communicating with a PLC CPU refer to the following manuals w gt W gt Included GT15 General 5 Purpose Description GT15 User s Manual GOT1000 Series z p GT 11 General GT11 User s Manual Connection Manual s 5
172. hic for the 16 dot standard font 16 2 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS Zz fe and Standard Monitor OS 5 mi z For the installation using GOT the CF card storing BootOS or Standard monitor OS is required z For the method of writing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the CF card the following two methods are 2 available 1 To Memory Card from GT Designer2 z L gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Su 8 8 Transferring Data Using a Memory Card S29 iz Swe 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or Standard monitor OS has been installed lam CF Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Point f Precautions on writing BootOS Standard monitor OS in CF card 2z o When writing BootOS Standard monitor OS etc in the CF card be sure to execute Zkz by the utility of other GOT or GT Designer2 oir The installation is not executed properly with the CF card to which uploaded from 2 the utility of GOT or copied by softwares other than GT Designer2 Note the available capacity of the CF card 2 gt The available capacity of BootOS and Standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To an owl Memory Card of GT Designer2 pka x5 OBE ode Communicate with Memory Card d 2 m Memory card wite Boot OS write Core OS wite era A C Builtin Flash Memory Zz lt z a wo Capacity of data of O
173. hing to CPU 2 32J A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 O O O for QCPU redundant system MELDAS C6 03 00 Communication driver Communication driver name has been 2 43V A QnA QCPU QJ71024 O x O changed 03 01 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K O x O Q173HCPU A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 Computer link fa Communication driver connection Communication driver name has been 2 43V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 03 01 O x O App 16 changed AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 03 01 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Wer Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description f Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 2 25B x O x Supporting connection to MELSECNET H MELSECNET H PLC to PLC network 235 Communication driver O O x connection PLC MELSECNET H 03 00 tO REG newark Supporting routing parameter setting with 243V Communication driver GT Designer2 f MELSECNET H 03 01 O x x Supporting connection to MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC connection Communication driver O 2 09K a O x Supporting connection to Q172HCPU MELSECNET 10 01 02 MELSECNET 10 Q173HCPU x connection PLC Sa to PLC network Supporting automatic system switching 232 Communication driver o o 5 for QCPU redundant system MELSECNET 10 03 00 Supporting routing parameter setting with Communi
174. i m i mea oO lt 4 40unc App 6 Appendix 1 External Dimensions BUS connection cable specifications Dimensions mm and Cable model Cable length m ft shape of the connector GOT side PLC side GT15 QCOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 10 33 Fig 3 Fig 3 GT15 QCOBS 15 49 20 66 25 82 30 98 35 120 Fig 3 Fig 3 GT15 CONB 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 1 Fig 2 GT15 ACOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 2 Fig 2 GT15 A1SCOB 0 7 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 1 Fig 1 GT15 A1SCLINB 0 45 1 5 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 4 Fig 2 GT15 J2COB 1 3 Fig 1 Fig 6 GT15 370COB S1 1 2 3 9 2 5 8 2 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 COEXSS 1 10 6 34 8 20 6 67 6 30 6 100 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 COBS 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 EXCNB 0 5 2 Fig 5 Fig 4 1 The GT15 CLJEXSS GT15 CLBS cable has a grounding wire 1 m Be sure to connect the wire to control panels 2 The GT15 CLJEXSS 1 is the set product consisting of GT15 EXCNB GT15 CL BS Refer to Fig A Pa PLC side GOT side Fig A Fig 4 Fig 5 4 Fig 4 Fig 4 i a GT15 EXCNB GT15 COBS C buffer circuit cable extension cable 33 0 1 30 e a 11 5 0 45 60 0 2 36 49 7 1 96 58 0 2 28
175. ied Language language can be performed regarding with the inese Simplified language displayed by utility and dialogue m guag played by y g amp z0 Korean 5 w 5 pense German A Factory setting User selected language m i O Battery alarm display Whether to display system alarm when the voltage of the lt At factory shipment OFF gt GOT internal battery has dropped can be specified The brightness or contrast can be adjusted Brightness Contrast LF Section 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment P 45 Invert colors W vi r a User creation screen and utility screen can be set to ON OFF oe GT1150 be highlighted or not lt At factory shipment OFF gt 25 WG a oa 1 If setting O the title screen is not hidden The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data N contents S 2 Applicated to GT1150 QLBD only Standard monitor OS Ver 03 01 00 or later m BootOS Ver 03 01 M or later Zog EZO Se abe Dga Loe sdo 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 11 1 1 Display setting functions 11 2 Point 1 2 Display setting by GT Designer2 Set title display period screen save time and screen save backlight at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT lt L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
176. ified torque range i WW Loose terminal screws Retighten SCrewS Not loose Retighten terminal screws 2 with screwdriver Be 2 Connection Poxmale wOldedians Visual check Proper intervals Correct Zy status terminals Soz rod F a TA Loose connectors Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing nugz screws U Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one sage status Foreign material Visual check No foreign matter Rermovedean attachment sticking O Refer to the following for the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure a W lt Section 8 5 Protective Sheet a 17 2 Periodic Inspection Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Ambient Display section 0 to 50 C Make measurement F temperature ith thermometer or Other portions 0 to 55 C For use in control panel temperature inside control Surrounding 1 i Ambient hygrometer environment ata M as re corrosive 10 to 90 RH panel is ambient y gas temperature Atmosphere No corrosive gas 24VDC Measure 2 Power supply voltage check voltage across 20 4 to 26 4VDC Change supply power terminals i Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws ana TDi forel No dirt forei tt stat
177. igner2 Drawing software for GOT1000 GOT900 series O indicates the version 6 The O is assigned with an integer 2 or more PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Contents For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female GT01 C30R2 9S Cable length 3m i and PC D sub 9 pin female Project data For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female GT01 C30R2 25P Cable length 3m P i i transfer cable and PC D sub 25 pin male GT01 C20USB 5P Cable length 2m For connecting GOT USB mini and PC GT09 C30USB 5P Cable length 3m USB 7 Connector shape on the cable is shown in Bar code reader Sold separately Model name 8 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series separately available T10 0039 The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb home page http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp melfansweb english index_e htm Product name Contents Bar code reader Commercially available bar code reader 2 11 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 3 SPECIFICATIONS i if a W 3 1 General Specifications 5 Item Specifications Display
178. ing testing device of Extended function OS PLC CPU or buffer memory of intelligent 2 09K i a O x O System monitoring System monitor 01 02 function module function Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Extended function OS 2 27D O x O Traditional German Korean System monitor 02 04 Function to monitor the network status of Option OS 2 18U O x xX Network monitor MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 etc Network monitor 02 02 function Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Option OS ppo g display Simp 227D p Z X Traditional German Korean Network monitor 02 04 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC A 01 02 Function for displaying sequence program i 2 09K Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q x x loaded to CPU on GOT QnA 01 02 Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 01 02 Option OS f cents Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Traditional G K 2 27D QnA 02 04 O xX x fea raditional German Korean Ladder monitoring Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX function 02 04 Supporting language switching Option OS Japanese Korean for displaying file 2 27D Ladder monitor for MELSEC O x x name and title of the sequence program Q QnA 02 04 Option OS Supporting the read of programs 2 43V Ladder monitor for MELSEC O x x comments Q QnA 03 01 Supporting reading comments from CF i pp g g 2 58L Option OS O x x cards Ladder monitor for MELSEC Supporting mo
179. int a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS anea eee ee eat eee eet eS eee Le ed A 1 REVISIONS orenga a a a a a a aiian A 6 INTRODUCTION preier a lia a a a eet ain Rees net a a ia aan A 7 QUT INE PRECAUTIONS a aer err e arei e ee beast pr aar parre ee eriei Eh A 7 CONTENT Sito r a a a a E a aa a e a aas A 8 ABOUT MANUAL S anin elie atid ai ata aia Mele eke ar e A 14 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS cccccccceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeees A 15 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL vs lt i cc cccecceie ce eceeectbeelecctecdl toseceicecc tk ccccetceniae eee A 18 APOV ER VIEW iiciin A 1 1 Tel FF OALUNGS czech ethan calenta es ied a eat ah feat cates Neate tanta e rates hela c ae adele 1 4 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure c ccc 02eeccce cece cece cee cnet eetedeeeeenedeeeeeuenencnteceneeeeneee 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION cccsseceeseeeeneeeeneeeees 2 1 2 1 Overall CONfQUIATION s cnisncivectenerieete tenet esos aw woes a eni 2 1 22 Component EisSteess naet od alt i a tl Ne hak a ald Stara 2 2 22 WG OM GT h AEA EE E E TA Shea oles E A ba ee ct edad ota ck a Pak Hs 2 3 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 ecccsceceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseescnceccaeeeeeseeeeeess 2 4 3 DP ECIFICA TIONS nriran e r 3 1 3 1 General Specification S A e a n te dean E a diode ieee 3 1 3 2 Performance SUECIICATIONS acini ae d
180. ion and external control Time Action i 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O are possible Standard monitor OS 02 02 Function to collect and accumulate device 2 18U Optien OS ion values i O O x Logging 02 02 Logging Function Function for converting multiple files 2 43V O O x The binary CSV Unicode format files output can be stored to another folder by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x external control Number of devices settable for one recipe Standard monitor OS 02 04 in GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 2 27D Option OS O O O Up to 8192 devices Recipe 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Reinetin Function to save recipe data of GT11 in 2970 Anton OS ecipe function i jon p CSV file format i O O O Recipe 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Function to save recipe data to the A drive 2 27D Option OS O O O standard CF card for GT11 Recipe 02 04 N uke Standard monitor OS 01 02 The extended function of the existing 2 09K Option OS O O x recipe function Advanced recipe 01 02 Function for converting multiple files 2 43V O x Advanced Recipe The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x external control i Standard monitor OS 03 03 The number of records that can be set is 2 58L Option OS ion changed to 2000 O O x Advanced Recipe 03 03 Standard monitor OS 02
181. ion specifying the file register name error occurred in PLC CPU drive 357 Error in specified PLC drive 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC Confirm PLC drive CPU drive 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed PLC file access failure 358 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC CPU Confirm PLC drive j f drive file register name When you specify drive 0 execute the recipe function again after changing to other drives When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name Processing from another other peripherals carry out the process to the file register 359 peripheral device i Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe Execute it after function again _ oe Division 0 was generated by the data operational expression 0 divisor division error 3 ais 360 i Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not Confirm operation expression become 0 370 Upper and lower limit value error The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower limit Confirm value setting Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit gt Lower limit Saree The time out erro
182. is recommended The version of each OS can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen Kind Version GIOSMONT OUT 02 01 05 12 40 apie a 02 0 gas 12 40 Explanation of OS version Basic 01 02 01 500K 01 00 00A l G1F12STG FON 02 01 05 12 41 BootOS version Basic 01 02 01 406K Appears only when the property GIOSMONT G1D 02 01 05 12 41 of the BootOS is displayed Basic 01 02 01 1K Minor version GIOSMONT G1 02 01 05 12 41 Major version Basic 01 02 01 230K GIFTTNMG FON AT 12 42 Basic 01 02 01 Refer to the following for details of the screen display operation lt Section 13 2 OS Information 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation z Point gt Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating Z plate of GOT rear face gt a GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD a MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL z MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX Sw rag oN Z290 SERIAL 540001 BC BC Src C BootOS zur MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION version 020 MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101A 80M1 IND CONT EQ C c US LISTED b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA oF GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA z9 aie 4 MITSUBISHI tot GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ IN 24VDC POWER MAX 00
183. ist editor 14 1 Self check Memory check Drawing check Font check Touch panel check and 1 O check 14 3 System alarm i GOT errors CPU errors 14 20 5 display GOT start time Time when the GOT was started 14 22 Sy one Str 14 1 Debug Sey This manual covers only an outline of the debugging function and operations until displaying the screen For display contents of each debugging function and operation method refer to the following manual i Zz gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Seg 432 14 1 1 Debug functions Duk AON The debug function includes functions for the PLC system status check and those for increasing the efficiency in troubleshooting oE The following items can be realized with the debug function 2x5 Ww Items Contents BEG System monitor The device of PLC CPU or buffer memory of the intelligent function module can be monitored and tested E A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited otb FX list editor The sequence program of FX PLC can be list edited a 2 lt z a D a 4 TE x O W pal O We l Ww p E ie O CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 14 1 Debug 14 1 14 1 1 Debug functions 14 1 2 Display operation of debug Main menu Debug amp self check L7 Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Touch Debug amp self check Self check System monitor Touch a debug function to operate ar
184. ist of Error Message System Alarm execute the following troubleshooting Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 18 3 1 Locating error positions Explanation regarding the method of specifying the error part Please refer to User s Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register 1 How to locate error positions a Use of peripheral devices Using the peripheral devices such as GX Developer check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and based on the error message on the PLC CPU check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses 2 Error timing Check the timing of errors 1 An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset The error may be detected by the initial processing of the PLC CPU In this case because the faulty module may not be identified use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed the module may be causing the error 2 An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds The error may occur in the sequence program Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the se
185. itor function O ms 2 ms 2 Transparent mode Setting of communication target channel ja setting No when using FA transparent function a s a Video Unit Setting of the video input signal and Z O x O D gt Settings resolution 3 Video Display Setting of the captive area size for each m video channel the color tone contrast O x O Settings i ng brightness and color intensity e RGB Display Setting of the RGB clock phase hori gt zontal screen position and vertical O x O Settings a screen position Selecting base clock O O O Displaying the present time of the clock O O X Time display and setting 4 Setting the present time of the clock O O x Displaying battery status O O x Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 9 App 10 Program data control O Applicable x Not Applicatble Not required ing i i GT Soft Drawing Setting items Function GT15 SET tHE GT11 Setting Installing OS O x O x Uploading OS O x O x OS information Displaying the properties of OS Type O x O x version date System file OS data check O x O x Downloading project file O x O x Uploading project file O x O x Deleting project file O X O x Project information Copying project file A drive gt A drive O x O x Displaying the properties of project file O x O x Date version screen title Project file data check O x
186. justable in 8 levels 220 cd m Adjustable in 8 levels Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment E Approx 50 000h Time for display intensity to become 1 5 at operating ambient temperature Life 2 i of 25 C Guaranteed 1 year Cold cathode fluorescent tube irreplaceable by a user backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 75 000h or longer Time for display Approx 54 000h or longer Time for display Life intensity reaches 50 at the operating intensity reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C ambient temperature of 25 C Guaranteed 1 year Guaranteed 1 year Number of touch keys 300 keys screen Matrix structure of 15 lines x 20 columns Key size Minimum 16 X 16 dots per key Touch Number of points pane touched Maximum of 2 points simultaneously Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max C drive 3 Flash memory Internal for storing project data 3Mbytes and OS Memory oe of 100 000 times D drive SRAM Internal 512kbyes battery backup Battery GT11 50BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data alarm history and recipe data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Guaranteed 1 year Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Environmental protective Equivalent to IP67 JEM1030 front section when the USB environmental protective cover is structure 4 attached External dimensions W164 6 46
187. key screen change Section 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting o The sensitivity of touch panel when GOT screen is 4 Key sensitivity setting ee Perey 1to8 1 Relationship between the key sensitivity setting and the key reaction speed The relationship between key sensitivity and key reaction speed is shown in the table below Decreasing the key sensitivity value will speed up the key reaction speed Increasing the key sensitivity value will slow down the key reaction speed ON When the GOT screen recognizes a single touch as two touches decrease the key sensitivity to slow down the key reaction speed Key sensitivity setting value Key reaction speed ms 120 Point P Operation settings by GT Designer2 Set buzzer volume and window move buzzer volume by GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup 11 10 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 1 Operation setting functions 11 3 2 Display operation of operation setting Zz Q Main menu GOT setup CF Section 9 3 Utility Display x 5 Touch GOT setup Touch Operation z u ZQo Sze ZU Operation Szi GOT setup peration 11 Buzzer volume
188. keyword CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 13 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Clear To access an FX PLC where a keyword has been registered keyword protection is cancelled amp Touching the Clear key pops up a keyboard for keyword input When the correct keyword is input and the key is touched the protection is cancelled Keywor d Please input keyword Target PLC Settings FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to cancel the protection Input a keyword into keyword to cancel the protection bii FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword 2nd keyword is ignored 1 Refer to the manual for the PLC in use for the models that are compatible with the 2nd keyword Protect A keyword with cancelled protection is reactivated for protection Keyword protection function is valid when the 2nd keyword is registered Touching the Protect key activates keyword protection 10 14 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION Zz O SETTINGS GOT SET UP Zz Ww E Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be display
189. les Displays the total number of the displayed files Remark Displayed folders and files l Refer to the following for the details of displayed folders and files K7 Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 15 13 3 Project Information 13 3 3 Display example of project information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Zz fe o 5 Display operation of project information E Project information screen Touch a drive in Select drive and the data 2 Program Data iProject information in the first folder contained in the touched elect drive drive is displayed A Built in CF card g B If touch a folder name the data contained Su in the touched folder is displayed aiz C Flash Memory SE Ee 1 SRAM If touch the folder with name the data Lan EEE in the one higher hierarchy folder is displayed Q a Touching the Aj button inthe scrollbar 6 i gt EO scrolls up or down by 1 line Se TuE Touching the A X button scrolls up or m down by 1 screen Project information screen Storage file folder display screen If touch a file name the file is selected and D o Program Data Project information the file name is highlighted 2x4 i EW Size Date Time GEO Refer to the following for operation of One delete copy property data check az download upload 1 3 Delete cen lt gt this section 9 lt COPY 2s cciniiicubituiti lt gt
190. liant Full Speed 12Mbps device 1ch S USB Use PC communication project data upload download OS 9 installation transparent function o PCMCIA compliant compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector type For TYPE only Use Data transmission and storage Option function f w For mounting the option function board 1ch Z board 1 1 Necessity of mounting the option function board may offer depending on the hardware version lt Refer to the following for details lt 3 Section 8 3 Option Function Board e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA w GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA 5 Specifications E a GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 1ch Bus Use PLC communication z QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A lt series 1ch Z Use PLC communication Serial interface RS232 compliant ich Built in Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps RS 232 Connecter type D sub 9 pin male Interface as Use Barcode reader connection PC communication project data g upload download OS installation transparent function Serial interface USB compliant Full Speed 12Mbps device 1ch USB Use PC communication project data upload download OS installation transparent function PCMCIA compliant compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector type For TYPE I only Use Data transmission and storage oO
191. light shutoff detection System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a backlight shutoff Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 D36 k4M20 Backlight shutoff detection M34 7 we Output to external device of PLC ctivated the output upon battery Se Activated the output batt shutoff detection wen indicates the output number at which the external device is connected Point P Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection 17 6 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM This chapter describes the error messages and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT or Controller the system alarm is available The error code can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information For details of system alarm and system information refer to the following lt gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 18 1 Error Contents Display This section describes how to identify the error code and system alarm displayed on the monitor screen by the system alarm display function and the reference material 18 1 1 Displaying format on monitor screen Displayed in user setting position The system alarm is dis
192. lity Call Key Setting wicectccs ook oe ak cat eee aes eee es ce Ste 11 16 11 5 1 Utility call key setting FUNCTION oseere E EEE A E R 11 16 11 5 2 Utility call key display operat on seror cece cent eee AAEE AE AEE AEA E EA TORR 11 16 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operatorn esie iaeei ttt e erent EA EE EEA EEEE EAEE AREETA i AARE 11 17 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY cccceeseeeeeeees 12 1 12 1 Time Setting and Display slscisininaiaioglcisnteidlinalsenet retinal meee 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display FUNCTIONS 00 00 reris eee ee eete AEEA Kata SEEE e UA TRAEN Aa 12 1 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and Setting cceccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeas 12 1 1221 3 Clock setting OperationS 24 754 4 seats E TETEA em ena eas Sha eat 12 2 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL sceeeeesseeeeeeeees 13 1 13 1 Data Storage LOCAOM acxtiencts oso cne legac taiuieab sensed ence sucamitinemmaleneisruactoeeaecenratee 13 1 43211 DiIVe NAM AllOCATION resar lade cdees ved daceeusiamencess a a Sale EE 13 1 A 10 13 1 2 Data type and storage lOCation eee rr tisrin nE ARNEE EE ERATE EE EAREN AAA 13 1 13 1 3 OS version Confirmation c ccccceccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeccceccaaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseesecsacsuaeeeeeeeeeess 13 3 1354 4 Display TlessAist t fe eesiee a tied thot Gas heint tines tn A ain dedi aoe 13 5 TZ
193. load is completed the dialog shown left is displayed Touching OK closes the dialog Upload is completed 13 11 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information up down by one screen Touching button returns the screen to the previous screen display Property display operation z Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder S Ww Program Data_control Property If touch button after selecting the 5 Date Time l F property displaying target folder the 5 Version Size Property screen shown left is displayed G1OSMONT OUT 06 10 04 14 21 i the Property screen the follewing MK Standard monitor OS information is displayed for each file e Basic 02 01 50 1015K selected by Su GIF 16STG FON 06 10 04 14 21 220 16dot Standard Gothic Font Item Contents Zn Basic 02 01 50 500K 7 elam G1F128TG FON 06 10 04 14 21 Name Displays the file name 020 12dot Standard Font Displays the following items according Basic 02 01 50 406K to the file type Boot BootOS Kind Standard Standard monitor OS om Communication Communication driver Seg Option Option OS agf Extend Extended function OS Doct Displays the version of BootOS and Version Os Displays the date and time of the file o Z Date Time Zs creation EiS Size Displays the file size ern Gok OLN If touch A Y button of the scrollbar the 13 screen scroll
194. lowing contents gt When CoreOS cannot be installed even after the following contents are checked there may be a a hardware problem aa 5 20 Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center LO Description Action X Check that the CF card access switch of GOT is ON Q The installation of CoreOS is not executed after the If it is OFF turn it ON 5 u CF card is insreted to GOT Memory card write from GT Designer2 may not be normally completed Execute D memory card write from GT Designer2 again 2 O The following message is displayed on GOT GOT main unit is breakdown 2 GOT error Contact your local sales office Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center The following message is displayed on GOT CF card is broken Z CF card error Installation will be canceled Check Format the CF card and execute the installation again N whether the CF card can be used Replace the CF card Su Either the wrong type of GOT was selected for the Core OS write setting of the GT z The following message is displayed on GOT Designer2 or the data on the CF card are broken ind Wrong operation system Make sure that the correct type of GOT is selected and execute Core OS write oe again 14 The following message is displayed on GOT S The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT woe f Install Core OS from the latest version of GT Designer2 O zZ Installation will be canceled Z Q Confirm the version of OS z
195. lows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices 3 All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual e This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life e Before using the
196. lt 3 Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 For the details of the forced screen saver enable signal refer to the following CF GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 3 6 System Information Setting 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting 18 10 ey MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION uw 0 lt gs gi Zy T o Xz wc X lt L lt APPENDICES 18 5 Starting GOT 18 5 1 Power Off Do not turn the GOT power OFF during the start up right after turning the GOT power on or during the restart up after transferring each OS or project data and changing the setting on the utility screen When Booting or Booting project data is displayed on the screen GOT is in start up mode or restart up mode lt When GOT standard monitor OS is V 01 02 01 or before gt When the GOT power in turned OFF the setting may return to the factory shipped default when the GOT power turned on next time If the power is turned off due to power failure or others install the OS or download the project data again lt When GOT standard monitor OS is V 01 02 02 or later gt Even if the power is turned off during the start up GOT operates in the condition that the OS and project data before the power OFF are stored when turning the GOT power on 18 5 2 Communication from GT Designer2 to the GOT GT Designer2 cannot communicate with the
197. mation 13 3 4 Operation of project information Transfer the project data to be downloaded to the GOT to the CF card using GT Designer2 or another GOT Install the CF card mentioned by to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card L gt Section 8 1 CF Card Touch A Built in CF card in Select drive 4 If touching Download button the screen mentioned left is displayed If touching LOK button the download is executed Same named project data has already Touch Ok button If there is no project Zz downloaded data of the same name in the C drive 2 Current Target tarts the d ibad 5 Built Version 207H 207H SANS ME DOW mae 5 Built Date 02 01 05 02 01 05 If there is a project data of the same name x oo es a in the C drive the screen shown left is 2 displayed without starting the download Downloading continue If touching OK button an overwrite OK Cancel download is executed to a project data of 5 the same name gt ow If evening Cancel button cancels the 290 downloading sre au O5 u 02H O When the downloading is completed the Download is completed Restart now completion dialog mentioned left is displayed GOT is restarted if OK button is touched 9 5 LON gt E0 FE we 28 N 2 5 xg coz Oxun EDNA AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY
198. mation aot 13 6 1 Memory information function 8 The following shows the amount of the memory empty area size and boot Drive information empty area size x which can be used by the user of each drive A Standard CF card C Built in Flash Memory Ooz Oxun 13 6 2 Memory information display operation 3 Main menu Program data control lt Section 9 3 Utility Display Fea 0S information tei Alarm information a Sea ee AND BATTERY T Project information 3 Memory card Format WZ lt Program data control Touch Q ae Memory information O z W N e O memory empty area size A Built in CF card 249192 K byte O Flash Memory 59 Project data area on S 2 gt OS area S3 Select a drive and no then format it oa N O 0 O 5 5 Sos Estes 252 Dga Z206 ZMV 13 6 Memory Information 13 32 13 6 1 Memory information function 13 6 3 Display example of memory information Program data Memory information memory empty area size Built in CF card 249192 K byte 1 Flash Memory Project data area 2942 K byte OS area 2056 K byte No Setting items Description Indicates the amount of memory empty area size for each drive in which a file or 1 Flash memory empty area size folder can be stored If CF card is not mounted A Standard CF card is not displayed 13 33 13 6 Memory Information 13 6 3 Display example of memory information 13 7 GOT data pack
199. memory check Standard CF card O x O x 3p Oo C drive memory check Built in flash rane Memory check O x O x g2 memory z D drive memory check Built in SRAM x xX O x 7 Missing bits color draw display and Ww Drawing check ae O x O x 2 overlap display check of liquid crystal Ds Lu Font check Installed fonts check O x O x si T B08 ouch panel wag O Touch panel operation check G x O x vza check O O 2 Connected target confirmation O x O x wo 1 0 check 7 3 Self loopback check O x O x 3 Monitoring of the LED status display of the Hf oO NETWK unit MELSECNET H communication unit and a status display CC Link communication unit GT15 a a J61BT13 lt Displaying GOT errors CPU errors Z System alarm x O 6 network errors O x display _ Resetting GOT errors x O Displaying GOT start date and time current GOT start time i O x O x time accumulated operating hours Displaying the screen to clean the display Screen cleaning dion O x x Backlight maintenance notification time setting Display section maintenance notification Maintenance report time setting T Touch key maintenance notification count setting Maintenance report Built in flash memory maintenance notification count setting Function to reset the values of backlight maintenance notification time counted for Integrated value maintenance time report display section maintenance n
200. ment of GT Designer2 for the folder name Su S520 3 22 C Flash Memory _ GT Designer2 Version O Screen Suir Di 1 SRAM Design Manual 020 nterna Section 3 1 GOT PLC Type Setting P Toot Install the CF card mentioned above to bs ease selec a_destination Next Cancel GOT 28 Refer to the following for inserting zsz removing method of CF card Gat L Section 8 1 CF Card Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder Open Project information and touch the F EEEE z Progi au Belaan A isa e riie drive of the file to be copied to select the z size Date Time drive and then touch the Next button ui a 82k 02 01 05 16 17 atn vin 01 06 05 17 02 The dialog for ealacting a copy destination S E folder as shown left is displayed oan 3 Please select a destination EDNA AND BATTERY Cony File name D Touch the folder display area to select a PROJECT 1 folder and then touch the Exec button m Copy destination The dialog shown left is displayed A PROJECT2 i Copy now oO nee O Oo Cancel z 59 ge gt Za ug oa 3 aves u ORE 592 E lt 9 Sz Zan 13 3 Project Information 13 18 13 3 4 Operation of project information Touch button Same named project data has already ok existed If there is no file of the same name in the Do you want to overwrite copy destination folder starts to copy If touch If touch Copy is completed I
201. meters 3 oe A Set communication parameters of communication devices Oo gt setting Z gt 5 Ea pes pRO OAS i i i OQ lt x 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation ozi Main menu Communication setting o gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Z Te To Communication Setting z Q Standard I F Setting EN wo Communication RS422 zo sein l Language Host PC 5 y Host PC i LU N CH Dr iver assign G Definition of ChNo O None LFA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Z we On 2S 25 Bia oo 3 ave u CS 2 692 Ex Qe Zan 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen Name of setting item and display item columns for Communication Setting Communication Setting Standard I F Setting ChNo R5422 lt 2 gt 0 None lt 4 ChNo R5232 lt 2 3 gt 9 Host PC lt 4 ChNo USB lt 2 3 gt 9 Host PC lt 4 Definition of ChNo O None OK L FA device 8 Barcode 9 PC 1 Channel Driver assign GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD only a Assigning channel No Channel No s can be assigned to each of the communication drivers installed in the GOT Without setting Communication Settings in GT Designer2 communication with PLC CPU is only available after assigning a channel No with this function b Changing communication driver The communication driver assigned t
202. mory was specified Correct devices j oo Correct the monitor device by setting file register of PLC CPU 18 5 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Error Error message Action code te One or more channel for PLC and host microcomputer connection Ch 1 Communication channel not set f f i 480 to 5 is not allocated by GT Designer2 or utility Set channel number on Utility Set the channel by GT Designer2 or utility 500 Warning Built in battery voltage The voltage of the GOT built in battery is decreased is low Replace the GOT built in battery The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range In this case the input value is not accepted 3191 Clock dale input out oirang Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again Cancelled the file of different contents and created a new file Unnecessary file deleted to AGa 522 Note that the old file is cancelled and the new file is created if the file of create new file Pee eee the same name with different contents exists when creating files 594 Device writing error When writing in the device error occurred Correct device Correct the device 595 Unable to read write alarm log Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project files under different projects Confirm where to store the alarm log file and alarm log file e No CF card is installed in the drive o
203. mple 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps amp See ae amp O e Setting Key It shifts to the setting screen of each setting item when touched ms TO Language English W i 5 8 Opening screen time 0 Sec E i x Screen save time 0 Min 0 None Contrast setting 8 16 a Screen save backlight OFF 5 Battery alarm display ON al Brightness contrast Setting 2 OK OK g 2 Setting contents are reflected if OK button is touched If X button is pressed without touching OK button the dialogue below is displayed and the changes 3 are canceled then the dialog box is closed Su With do not push OK button oa if you close the screen the changed ta value will be canceled Wg 0K oa 8 ave u ORE 532 OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed 40 Cancel button The operation setting screen is displayed FE Zan 9 3 Utility Display 9 9 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Keyboard operation Touch the numerical value to be changed Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously The key board display position changes by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting Communication Standard I F Setting Cursor ena 21671 8 9 Del lt gt OL 11213141 Cancel Enter Input numeric with keyboard e 10
204. n eraenc oreramon terma GOT 1000 Specifications Displays the utility screen and the user creation screen 2 Touch key 3 USB interface For operating the touch switches in the utility screen and the user creation screen USB interface for connecting a personal computer OS installation project data download transparent USB environmental protection cover Opens Closes when the UBS interface is used 5 POWER LED Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving Blinking in orange green Blown backlight bulb Not lit Power is not supplied For the PC connection refer to the following gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Section1 5 System Configuration 4 1 4 1 Front Panel 4 2 Back Panel a im T Remark Connecting the back panel R gt For the connection to the controller PLC microcomputer board bar code reader Q etc or PC refer to the following gt GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual 2 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD z HE pz 4 DA a Battery cover opened 58 2 7 L S ES O 0 Ww Ss CY 24v Dc D gt FG AA 4 EB E il
205. n Manual or Help functions of 5 GT Designer2 2 2 Wire for the GOT power supply Refer to Chapter 7 WIRING D a i 8 Attach the option function board lt Refer to Chapter 8 OPTION Only when necessary When transferring data via a cable When transferring data via the CF card 0 Y t B Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable n S or RS 232 cable Insert the CF card in the PC E rm y n Install and download the OS program Write the OS project data installed project data installed in the PC to the GOT in the PC in the CF card 1 Install the standard monitor OS 1 Write the standard monitor OS Refer to GT Designer2 Version O communication driver extended communication driver extended function Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual functions OS option OS to GOT OS option OS in the CF card g 2 Download the project data created 2 Write the project data created Refer to 16 INSTALLATION OF by the PC by the PC in the CF card core OS BOOTOS AND STANDARD z MONITOR OS in this manual for the a operations of GOT Install the CF card to GOT to install and download the standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS project data S to the built in flash memory 5 Y a x Check the communication settings Z AA Connect the cable t0GO Tand the destination Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual connector Yy z Turn on the GOT power and the system of the 2 connection destination Sh
206. nctions and do not require the option function board 7 E 8 3 1 Applicable option function board i The table below shows the type of option function board that can be used with GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 a QLBD Model Contents GT11 50FNB Option function board S 8 3 2 Part names z Groove for reverse 2 installation protection Connector for connecting GOT Lever Ht for removal Groove for reverse installation protection 8 3 Option Function Board 8 5 8 3 1 Applicable option function board 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board Installing Turn the GOT power off Dummy cover Rise the lever on the dummy cover with a fingernail as shown in the figure on the right Pinch the lever with fingers and pull up it vertically to remove the dummy cover 4 Install the option function board to the option function board connector on the back panel of the GOT Push down the option function board by approximately 0 5mm with fingers along the groove for reverse installation protection Cross sectional view with option function board installed Push down by approx 0 5mm 4 Option function O 4 9 at four corners board N GOT main unit x 1 S Floated gt lt A N Inclined Do not keep the option function board in a floated or inclined status Do not touch the circuit board in the GOT main unit during the option function board installation reverse installation protection
207. nearest sales office or FA Center Q Zz T Ww 8 Z 2 m E zZ T INSPECTION 1 Life of backlight m The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility Bs of GOT GOT set up wr Refer to the following for details Soz XAJ LCF Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP he 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm 4 When the GOT detects a backlight shutoff the system information set with GT Designer2 is turned on 5 You can issue a backlight shutoff of the GOT from the PLC to external devices such as the lamp or buzzer a lt x using system information To avoid any screen touch operation by the user who misunderstands it is in screen saving mode install an external alarm and interlock the loads that would cause danger For details of the system information refer to the following lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Section 3 6 System Information Setting ae Hint Example of alarm output to external devices such as lamp or buzzer QO Dz The following provides an example of outputting the backlight shutoff detection signal from a FX Series PLC to an external device using system information Condition The Written Device is D20 and all data is used the Select All button is clicked on the setting screen of GT Designer2 for the system information assignment D36 b14 D36b14 Back
208. necessary to use the GOT grounding terminal only when it is in the grounded condition Be sure to ground the grounding for the safety reasons and EMC Directives Functional grounding Improves the noise resistance Point gt Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 5 1 3 Grounding 5 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Sa PART NAME EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable Connection conditions and models where the EMC Directive is applicable are shown below Available April 2005 5 2 1 About models applicable to the EMC Directive The following table lists the modules compliant with the EMC Directive Compliant with EMC Directive X Not compliant with EMC Directive EMC Directive Hardware version GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Point gt Please use the GOT whose hardware version is later than that described ___ Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo Aa MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SERIAL 540001 BC BC Hardware version MITSUBIS
209. netic Compatibility 89 336 EEC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC GOT series products identified here manufactured from April 1st 2005 GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD For this product see note under and over the page Standard Remark EMI Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EN61131 2 2003 Radiated Emissions Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirement and tests EMS ESD RF electromagnetic field EFTB Surge RF conducted disturbances and Power frequency magnetic field 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 5 1 5 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Sa PART NAME EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 1 2 Control cabinet The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel or cabinet It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel 1 2 Control cabinet a Use a conductive control cabinet b When attaching the control cabinet s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet and plate c To ensure good electrical contact with the control
210. nication driver at once when only BootOS is already installed on the GOT Added common settings object functions nen Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 JPEG file reading enabled 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x Figure Function to import IGES format data 2 43V O O O Enables adjusting image qualities for 2 47Z O O x reading JPEG files Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Text Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x Enables specifyng of background color 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O oO Japanese 12dot Japanese 16dot Gothic 2 04E Standard monitor OS 01 01 O O O Japanese 16dot Mincho Japanese supporting Europe 12dot Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Gothic Standard font Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Mincho Chi Simplified 12dot 9 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 e Chinese Simplifie o i h a i Boot OS G O O O Chinese Simplified 16dot Mincho e Chinese Simplified supporting Europe 12dot e Chinese Simplified supporting Europe 16dot Mincho Enables setting the KANJI region 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 O O x Supporting Thai 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 O O x The following font name is changed e Stroke Standard Font JPN The following fonts are added Extended function OS Stroke font
211. nitoring local devices 2 58L Q QnA 03 03 O x x App 30 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series lt r Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Function to monitor and change the data Intelligent module Option OS of intelligent function module buffer 2 18U oO x x monitor function i Intelligent module monitor 02 02 memory using a dedicated screen List editor for Function for displaying editing sequence 09K Option OS MELSEC A program saved from ACPU with list mode List editor for MELSEC A 01 02 O x O Function to display edit the sequence Option OS program read out from the FXCPU in the 2 18U List editor for MELSEC FX O x O list mode 02 02 Extended function OS List editor for Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 2 27D List editor for MELSEC FX O x O MELSEC FX 02 04 Supporting display of Chinese Simplified pps SI Simp Extended function OS Traditional German and Korean f s 2 27D List editor for MELSEC FX O x O GT11 supports display of Chinese 02 04 Simplified Traditional and Korean Ea p Function to monitor the servo amplifier Servo amplifier Option OS and also to change parameters execute 2 18U O xX xX monitor function Servo amplifier monitor 02 02 test run etc Function t
212. nnot be used 2 Display of communication driver Communication drivers are displayed in the order of installation To change the assigned communication driver to one that is not listed change the Communication Settings of GT Designer2 and download to the GOT 10 1 Communication Setting 10 7 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Zz fe lt L O Zz O 8 lt 0 tZ re wE Eiu Zo DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND Channel number setting operation Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set Communication Setting Standard F Setting Host PC TET Le ed te The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed Keyboard Enter the channel number from the keyboard and touch the Enter key to settle the entered value Setting the channel number to 1 displays the name of the communication driver for which CH No 1 is assigned with GT Designer2 in the driver display box Communication Setting Standard ka Setting Definition of ChNo O None 1 FA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Communication detail settings switching operation If you touch the driver displ
213. not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Clock setting operations With do not push OK button Touching the OK button reflects the if you close the screen the changed settings and restarts updating the clock S va lug will be canceled display 2 Then the settings are reflected to both clock data on the GOT and controller 5 If touch X button the GOT restarts if the OK Cancel clock settings is changed or the screen E closes if clock settings is not changed an If touch X button without touching OK 529 button the dialogue box shown on the left SmE is displayed 020 button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed oF LOn Cancel button The time display and Zkz setting screen is displayed oir 12 GOT internal battery voltage status e9 Displays battery voltage status 25 Ea Display Status BES 2 Normal Normal SP ood JZE Low None Low voltage San When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately Refer to the following for battery replacement procedure L gt Section 8 4 Battery FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 5 12 1 3 Clock setting operations 13 F
214. nufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products Point gt Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements The sections 5 1 1 through 5 3 2 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the GOT The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the requirements and the applicable standards control However we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above mentioned directives The method of conformance to the EMC Directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery 5 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing to the identified standards and design analysis forming a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromag
215. o execute servo monitor and f Option OS parameter setting for motion controller 2 18U O x x Q motion monitor A Q motion monitor 02 02 CPU Q series function Parameter setting is enabled for 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x x Q172HCPU Q173HCPU CNC monitor Function to monitor the MELDAS that is Option OS A 2 18U O x x function connected to the GOT CNC monitor 02 02 Function to back up setting data for Backup restore Extended function OS controllers and to restore the data to the 2 58L O x x function Backup Restore 03 03 controllers Standard monitor OS 02 02 f Communication driver Multi channel Function to monitor multiple controllers els i i 2 18U Use the communication driver O x x function with a single unit of GOT 02 02 or later for each connection Option OS Function for monitoring each controller Gateway function Mail from one GOT PC or sending a mail from 2 09K 01 02 O x x GOT Gateway function Server Client Gateway function 01 02 S rting the FTP functi 2 18U Seton upporting the server function Pp 2 Gateway functionFTP 02 02 O x x Enables transfer of binary data by the FTP Option OS i 2 32J O x x server function Gateway FTP 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 00 f Function to display document on the GOT 2 32J Option OS O O x Documentalsplay Document Display 03 00 function Image quality adjustment for documents is 2 43V Standard monitor O
216. o the channel can be changed using the communication setting To change the communication driver it is required to pre install the communication driver to be changed in the GOT K gt Section 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting 2 Standard interface display box Communication interface included as standard in GT1100 a GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD The standard interface includes the following three types RS232 For communication with PC GT Designer2 PLC microcomputer bar code reader and other equipment RS422 For communication with PLC and microcomputer USB For communication with PC GT Designer2 GOT front face GOT rear face USB interface Standard interface mini RS 422 interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface 10 2 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Standard interfaces have the following three types BUS For communication with PLC RS232 For communication with PC GT Designer2 and barcode reader USB For communication with PC GT Designer2 an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 CF_CARD ACCESS OFF ON a i lt BATTERY Zz fe Lt O Zz O 8 3 LO LZ ite Wu LU Zn
217. oesnt nana Ol ad Ba and eatin 3 2 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications issncedvel screed cuts sveloesadd vee iaacianestinekwantens dutapuesndenadisacedaaanes 3 5 3 4 Power Supply Specifications 3 2eseiiicsaic ited sade ocsgucadecongearesow iisckonn oneends oataace nee ena 3 6 BPA RIN Pa Us roenan a a 4 1 4A1 Fr nt ANG cose tcectene ees setesduete tic Ss ret ciate ais cine eine a tel ial ee cele 4 1 4 2 Back Panel senesni lac sac este la ee Io aha ble he nd oe tay 4 2 SEMC DIRECTIVE anaa 5 1 5 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 5 1 5 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive 0 0 0 0 cccccccccccecseseeeseseeeeesesececececeeeeeeeeeesesaeaeaeauaaeaeess 5 1 5 2 Control Cabinetiwn 2e ence lee eee ee eles ee A a e a a aA 5 2 TTo Grounding eria erra ete inate e dase eae ie 5 3 5 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 4 5 2 1 About models applicable to the EMC Directive cccccceececeeeeeeeececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 4 522 Connection format cs 45 200 oie Sei ede Ge tii eid ae led vie eee Eade ae Ra ethos eS 5 4 5 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives eee 5 5 5 3 eAbout the Cable USCG Tn tives coated vests dade a beater taba deeded aden aR e E e a Aa a NARAR KAO ado vag TANE ian 5 5 5 3 2 Method to connect the power wire and ground wire e
218. of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 SIL SS asin secede tes arses nine inn sp ped aE Eaa e e di EE aeae App 15 Appendix 4 1 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 e cece ce cece eee eeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaaees App 15 Appendix 4 2 FOr Gi O iste tachi aaa araa lola eaaa adadedbeel lad olin labzectha had tive dad iad ied dads App 33 INDEX fess tetanic cow E cevargcensacencawaes Index 1 ABOUT MANUALS The following manuals are also related to this product In necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below For the handy GOT GT1155HS QSBD GT1150HS QLBD refer to the Handy GOT User s Manual provided separately Related Manuals Manual Number Model Code Manual Name GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series Describes methods of the GT Designer2 installation operation basic operation for drawing and transmitting data SH 080529ENG to GOT1000 series 1D7M24 Sold separately a GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 1 3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 2 3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 3 3 SH 080530ENG 1D7M25 Describes specifications and settings of the object functions used in GT Designer2 Sold separately a GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 3
219. of malfunctions related wiring Remedy 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside Run power lines servo amplifier drive wires and communication cables so that they do not cross each other Noise interference that is generated by cables that cross each other may cause malfunctions Surge suppressors are an effective way to filter out surge noise that is generated from no fuse breakers NFB electromagnetic contactors MC relays RA solenoid valves and induction motors Refer to the section to follow for surge killers LF 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment Uncrossed power lines and Crossing power lines and communication cables communication cables GOT connection cable PLC 1 0 wire Fs Drive control wire Terminal block Terminal block 7 2 2 Outside the panel To pull the power line and communication cable out of the panel make two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference Power line Power line Connection Do Si cable Connection cable Pullout hole Pullout hole Keep the power line and communication cable inside the duct at least 100 mm away from each other If that is not possible the use of a metal separator inside the duct can reduce noise interference Power line 100mm or more Signal line power line Signal line
220. of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company App 14 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series The following describes the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 Version2 58L For function comparisons among GOTs refer to the following MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION L gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Appendix 3 2 List of Differences between the GOT1000 series and GOT 900 series functions For using the following functions use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later Applicable OS versions and communication drivers for GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 are different from those for GT10 The added functions for GT10 are listed separately from those for GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM Point fP How to use this table provides the versions of GT Designer2 and OS required for each GOT or communication unit APPENDICES and the following provides description for the functions added with the version upgrade and the versions of GT Designer2 and OS with which the function is compatible Regarding and the following there may be a case where the function is not supported by
221. oject 2 18U Screen script project script Settings on the Script Edit dialog are available for screen script and project script 2 27D Auxiliary setting Setting of maintaining screen numbers of the screens being displayed System Information during screen switching is added 2 27D Expansion Reduction Supports expansion reduction when multiple objects and shapes are selected Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series 2 32J O Continued to next page O O App 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES a Version of GT F GT GT Soft GT Item Description 4 Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Function for capturing the specified range Screen capture f 2 43V O O O and loading to GT Designer2 Interval of magnification specification has been changed buttons have been added Zoom 2 43V O O Zoom in zoom out operations using the Ctrl key and Mouse wheel have been added Holds the previous downloaded drive 2 47Z O x O e Enables updating BootOS without the standard monitor OS updated when only BootOS is already installed on the Communication GOT 2 58L BootOS 03 03 P O x O App 22 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Enables installing the standard monitor OS with the commu
222. olors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in Q bus serial interface GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GOT 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built GT1155 QSBDA res eae in battery built in A bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 GT1150 QLBDQ f sea T baie scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in Q bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 GT1150 QLBDA ew aa ae scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in A bus serial interface 2 3 2 2 Component List 2 2 1 GOT GT11 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 PLC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Contents a FXCPU GT01 C10R4 8P 1m z direct 2 connection GT01 C30R4 8P 3m i For connecting FXCPU MINI DIN 8 pins and cable z GOT FX GT01 C100R4 8P 10m amp For connecting FXCPU expansion board MINI m expansion 0 DIN 8 pins and GOT Wir board GT01 C200R4 8P 20m DE connection ie cable GT01 C300R4 8P 30m 12 ar QnNAl GT01 C30R4 25P 3m FXCP Cable di o 5 For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller S irec A u connection GT01 C100R4 25P 10m CPU A series FXCPU D sub 25 pins and g GOT amp ca
223. on of memory card 2 Ss Formats the CF card or Internal SRAM 5 13 5 2 Display operation of memory card format Sy Main menu Program Data control Program Data control S32 I Section 9 3 Utility Display Sie 824 Touch Zz OUC LOn Program data control Memory card format ae an An Memory card format Program data Memory card format EX Chae Select Drive 2 3 A Built in CF card Eug HEA lt n2 OL D Internal SRAM Select a drive and format it 3 alee NaN eee AND BATTERY x H x O u d Point 7 Formatting the D drive Internal SRAM S If the GOT is turned off and left in the status without a battery for 30s or longer the data in the D drive Internal SRAM becomes indefinite possibly disabling data writing If the GOT is left in the status without a battery for 30s or longer format the N D drive Internal SRAM Su Z gt 25 Bia oa 8 S J Sos ngg 13 5 Memory Card Format 13 30 13 5 1 Format function of memory card 13 5 3 Format operation of memory card Program data Memory card format Select Drive Built in CF card D Internal SRAM Program data Memory card format Please input password Caution If execute format operation all data on the CF card will be initialized Please do not remove CF card while formatting Format the CF card OK Cance Format now OK Cance 13
224. on to FP X O xX O The device range applicable to monitoring Communication driver is extended 2 58L MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP Up to 991F for R and up to 911 for WR 03 03 O x O can be set Communication driver Supporting connection to MP2000 and MPA0OO 2 47Z YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H O x O NASKAWAREG CP9300MS 03 02 connection ina he Eih t 4 9 ATZ Communication driver upporting the Ethernet connection P q Ethernet YASKAWA 03 02 O O x Communication driver Supporting connection to STARDOM 2 32J YOKOGAWA FAS500 FA M3 O x O een STARDOM 03 00 connection Communication driver Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 47Z O O x Ethernet YOKOGAWA 03 02 Can use L device by MicroLogix 1000 Communication driver 2 18U O x O 1200 1500 series AB MicroLogix 02 02 Communication driver Allen Bradley PLC Supporting connection to Control 2 58L AB Control CompactLogix O x O connection CompactLogix 03 03 s ana the eth i Seni Communication driver upporting the Ethernet connection Pp 3 EtherNet IP AB 03 03 O x x SIEMENS PLC Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 418U Communication driver connection 200 series i SIEMENS S7 200 02 02 O x O Microcomputer Supporting XON XOFF control pore Communication driver O x n connection Supporting interrupt extension l Computer 03 00 O x Communication driver Supporting connection to OMRON 2 18U OMRON THERMAC INPANEL O x O OMRON temperature
225. onal computer OS installation project data download transparent D sub 9 pin male 3 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for the inserting installation fittings accessory during the GOT installation to the panel 4 holes at top and bottom 4 Rating plate nameplate 5 CF card access LED Lit CF card accessed Not lit CF card not accessed 6 CF card access switch Switch for prohibiting access to CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF No access to CF card CF card removal possible 7 CF card cover Open or close when inserting or removing the CF card 8 Battery cover Open or close when replacing the battery 9 Power terminal Power terminal and FG terminal for power supply 24VDC to GOT and grounding CF card interface Interface for installing the CF card to GOT CF card eject button Button for removing the CF card Battery 4 3 4 2 Back Panel GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history and recipe data The project data is stored in the built in flash memory 5 EMC DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Ma
226. onitoring faulty stations and to za Communication driver 2 connection disconnect communications with FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 03 O x O a controllers are added Supporting connection to YAMATAKE Communication driver 2 18U O x O YAMATAKE temperature controller YAMATAKE SDC DMC 02 02 temperature The functions to automatically stop controller monitoring faulty stations and to Communication driver l es 2 58L O x O connection disconnect communications with YAMATAKE SDC DMC 03 03 controllers are added Communication driver Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA 2 43V YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 O x oO YOKOGAWA temperature controller UT2000 03 01 temperature controller The functions to automatically stop Corainuiniestion driver connection monitoring faulty stations and to 2 58L YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 o x O disconnect communications with UT2000 03 03 controllers are added p Communication driver Supporting connection to RKC teriperature controller 2 18U RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O x O 02 02 D tart Supporting connection to SRZ oO x O controller connection The functions to automatically stop Communication driver monitoring faulty stations and to 2 58L RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS disconnect communications with 03 03 O x O controllers are added Supporting connection to inverter 2 18U Communication driver O x O FREQROL 500 700 02 02 Inverter connection Setting range for Timeout Time ha
227. onochrome display In the monochrome display 16 scales are used to improve the display e High speed monitoring through high speed serial communication at maximum tare of 115 2 kbps or through bus connection with the PLC e High speed display and high speed touch switch response More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works e The 3MB user memory is included as standard e CF card interface is included as standard The USB connector is positioned on the GOT front This enables the system startup to be performed more efficiently using FA device setup tool and eliminates the indirect works opening and closing the control panel cable replacement cable rewiring in order to improve the working efficiency Enhanced support of FA setup tools PLC program transfer and monitoring are possible via the personal computer that is connected to the GOT if connected directly to the A QnA Q or FX series of the PLC CPU FA transparent function 1 1 Features 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown z gt C Start 3 y Install GT Designer2 in the PC Refer to GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual z O z F ____ Refer to GT Designer2 Version I z reate project data Screen Desig
228. ontact your nearest sales office or FA Center The following example explains about Memory Check using Flash memory C drive For the standard CF card A drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as Flash memory Internal Flush memory area write read check Execute now KEI 15 6 E AC Del Enter t Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen and touch the button If select the OK button the numeric keyboard window is displayed If select the Cancel button the screen returns to the initial menu Touch 5 9 2 o and then Enter The password is fixed to 5920 Touching Enter executes read write check for the flash memory 14 3 Memory Check 14 5 14 3 3 Memory check operation COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS Internal Flush memory area write read check Executing now Internal Flush memory area Normaly completed ok Remark Password change ds The password cannot be changed When input password error the cancel dialog is displayed If touch OK
229. operation of drawing check Basic figure check Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Filled circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse i To a Pattern 1 of Move check among screens 14 10 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 3 Display and operation of drawing check Move check among screens Zz O a Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check 5 The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals E If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed visually in order it is normal 5 For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale 6 529 Sip A Q zz og see tot N gt Pattern 1 2x4 mae 20 Oo b Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check Ze The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed visually in order it is normal 2 For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale gt Q W To Faten 3 x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 Z H Ee On On d Z gt Z4 to Pattern 2 Wg oa no ave O JE 4 220 Sn 229 EZ D23 Bos sdo 14 4 Drawing Check 14 11 14 4 3 Display and operation of drawing check c Pattern 3 Shape transfo
230. or OS 02 04 O O value number Function to collect data only when display Bar graph f 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O A O trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number ae Function to collect data only when display Statistics graph f 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 27 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description 5 Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Up to 101 points can be set for scale i 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Scatter graph Function to collect data only when display f f 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added Historical Trend Function to display the data collected by cee 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 01 O O x Graph the logging function in trend graph format Second specificat
231. or OS 03 00 24 Function to display the personal computer w lt lt RGB displa 2 32J Extended function OS screen on the GOT Video RGB 03 00 O x x ideo 00 Number of screens that can be called on GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O Up to 2047 screens Screen calling setting with dragging is 2 43V O O O APPENDICES possible Set overlay screen Specifying of placement position Front Back for the basic and called screens is 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O possible Disable background colors of overlay screen when setting an overlay screen 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 O O O can be set Function for changing device value with Test function 2 09K Standard monitor OS 02 02 displaying test window I l O x O Function to execute scripts in unit of 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x Project Script project file 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O Function to execute scripts in unit of 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x Screen Script screen 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O Function to execute scripts in unit of Option OS Object Script l 2 18U O O x object Object Script 02 02 Key codes for increment key and 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O decrement key are added Key code for historical trend graph is i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02
232. ose the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with X button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Z CONE D Setting item is changed if setting item is R Language English t hed ON A OFF Opening screen time 5 Sec DUCIE P z r i Min O N Sereen save ll a Setting contents are defined if OK button Screen save backlight OFF is touched Battery alarm display ON X V z Brightness contrast Setting gt OK Ow 50 m 282 Sui Seu With do not push OK button If X button is touched without touching if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialogue mentioned left value will be canceled is displayed ee OK 23 OK button The change contents are nee E canceled and the screen aan is closed OK Cancel Cancel button The display setting screen F is displayed 24 Era mae 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup 2an r screens after completing the setting of all ook items to change with X button GOT eag restarts and reflects the setting contents Q zZ lt z TZ a els wo 0 LO lt O W ele O W N e D oO Zz O 50 S gt 25 uo oa 8 f u OE a 28s Zan 11 1 Display Settings 11 5 11 1 3 Display setting ope
233. otOS Standard monitor OS from the CF DIR G1SYS 02 01 05 14 42 l card to GOT Z 492KB 3056KB OF ile ay Touch Install 16 6 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility The CF card access LED is lit during install Zz Boot 0S f YALL CT execution 2 Now installing Boot0S 9 5 Do not pull out the CF card power OFF or z reset the GOT while the CF card access 3 card is lit 5 2 O an 50 ZWE 828 After the installation is finished the dialog install te conplet d box shown on the left is displayed Restart now Touch the LOK button to reboot the GOT Z5u 8 After confirming that GOT restarted zZ normally switch OFF the CF card access Dik N switch of GOT Confirm the CF card access LED is o extinguished remove the CF card from the 2x4 CF card interface of GOT DEA yis ode oto a Z lt z 5 els wo LO x O W a O u p e O Oo Zz O 59 On z iz 3a N Oo a O we 3 z a 226 Sune HOG 258 ont Zan 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 7 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 1 Boot OS installation When the Boot OS is installed the GOT compares the version of the current Boot OS and the version of the Boot OS to
234. otification time touch key x x reset 7 f ai a maintenance notification count and built in flash memory maintenance notification Integrated value reset count 1 Itis necessary to perform the followings by GT Designer2 Installation of communication driver Assignment of channel No and communication driver 2 The following display and operations are not allowed with the GT11 e Chinese Traditional cannot be displayed Japanese and Chinese Simplified cannot be selected on the GOT screen Japanese and Chinese Simplified fonts cannot be installed at the same time 3 It is necessary to set the security level by GT Designer2 4 Mount a battery as necessary 5 Itis necessary to mount a RS 232 connector for test KE Section 14 7 I O Check 6 GT11 will display only the GOT error and CPU error 7 Itis necessary to mount the option function board and battery Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 13 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Appendix 3 1 Relevant models The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below Battery for GOT1000 Series GT11 50BAT Lithium coin battery Non dangerous goods Appendix 3 2 Transport guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any
235. played together with an error code its error message and occurrence time The displayed error code and error message are registered to the GOT in advance and need not to be prepared by the user 335 Memory card battery voltage low Replace battery 16 40 30 104 Parameter error 400 Unable to communicate with CPU Error code Error message Time of occurrence Displayed only for errors related to GOT Up to 3 lines are displayed 1 line per error Display priority The alarm is displayed in the following priority if the displaying range is one or two lines 1 GOT error The error in the GOT is displayed as an alarm 2 CPU error The error in the PLC CPU is displayed as an alarm 3 Network error The error in the network is displayed as an alarm Alarms with smaller priority cannot be displayed if system alarms overflow the displaying range As well the error code error message or time is not displayed if the displayed message overflows each line in the displaying range 18 1 Error Contents Display 2 Error code and reference manual Q Zz Error source Error code Contents Reference i Zz 0 to 99 User s manual of the ACPU ZS Error code of CPU for ACPU a5 Value of D9008 connected with GOT bo TA Error code of CPU 2 X User s manual of the FXCPU to FX PLC 1 CPU which GOT is connected 100 to 299 Third pee If a third party PLC is connected M Temperature controller 2
236. product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric e This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system e When using this product combining other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulation which a user should suit Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is used for user itself e If in doubt at any stage of the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor e Since the example indicated by this manual technical bulletin the catalog etc is reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of equipment and system when employing Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples e About this manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement e The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however you have noticed a doubtful po
237. ption OS xe Enables saving the operation log for the cn O tion Log 03 03 a eration Lo 03 operator authentication 3 O O x aa Extended function OS Operator authentication 03 03 2 00A Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O x Comment Comment group can be used 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O Enables setting the background color of Part i 2 47Z O O oO the figures in the Parts Editor screen APPENDICES User defined key window display can be switched in synchronization with the 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O language switching device Key Window In the user defined key window input range maximum value and input range 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O oO minimum value are displayed Object rename Function to allow setting of object name 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x Figure created as a part can be used to a 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O Lamp lamp Comment Group can be used 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 O O x figure Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Stroke font applicable 2 43
238. ptions z Options can be selected among Read Write Protect Write Protect or All Protect z For access restrictions of each setting refer to the manual of the PLC to be used a o gt wo 20 LO x O W I O u Lu 7 al O 0 z O e S9 Qe z gt 25 go A On no re aves O 5 5 fe os Sak abe oga ZOr sdo 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 11 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 10 12 2 Point P 1 Selection of keyword protection level For the devices which can perform the online operation of FX PLC 3 levels of protection can be set When the monitoring or setting change by online devices is needed set the keyword taking the following into consideration a When only keyword is registered Protection level is selected by the head character of keyword All operation prohibition Set the keyword starting with one of A D to F or 0 to 9 Read incorrect write protection Set the keyword starting with B Erroneous write prohibition Set the keyword starting with C b When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered Protection level is selected by Registration options Applicability of monitoring for each keyword protection level The applicability of monitoring for each protection level is as follows When keyword and 2nd keyword are When only keyword is registered registered Keyword fet Read unregistered Setting items All nead Erroneous Read f a in
239. quence program 3 An error occurs when a specific device operates The mis operation may be caused by noise Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating device If the line is too close to the device separate the line 100 mm or more from the device a Locating the module where an error occurs Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information locate a specific module where an error occurs By the method stated above correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one and check whether the error occurs If the error continues to occur it may have another cause Referring to 18 3 2 Further locating error positions locate the error position further 18 7 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 3 1 Locating error positions 18 3 2 Further locating error positions If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is replaced with a new one the error may be caused by the effect from another module Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the module located furthest from the operating position in the system and check for the status of occurrence of the error each time the cables are disconnected until the error does not occur The module or extension cables bus connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to c
240. r OS 02 02 GT SoftGOT1000 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT15 QBUS 2 GT15 ABUS 2 GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE 2 18U Communication driver For communication drivers used in each connection use 02 02 or Standard monitor OS 03 01 GT15 CFCD 2 43V BootOS 03 01 M GT15 CFEX CO8SET 2 45X Standard monitor OS 03 02 Extended function OS GT15 SOUT 2 58L Sound Output 03 03 Extended function OS GT15 DIO 2 58L External I O Operation Panel 03 03 Added connection types ae Version of GT i GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Communication driver 2 04E Bus Q 01 00 O x x Bus A QnA 01 00 GT15 Communication driver Bus Q 03 03 Supporting connection to BUS Bus A QnA 03 03 2 58L STi Bus connection i BootOS 03 03 P O O O Standard monitor OS 03 03 Communication driver Bus Q 03 03 Bus A QnA 03 03 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K O x x Q173HCPU Bus Q 01 02 ase Communication driver Priority order of data load can be set 2 43V O x x Bus connection Q 03 01 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K O x O Q173HCPU A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 z a tion to EX3U seri 2 18U Communication driver upporting connection to series PP i MELSEC FX 02 02 O O O Direct connection f pa Communication driver Supporting automatic system switc
241. r alarm 8192 alarms When Bit Trigger is not met whether to F 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O 3072 alarms Function to save alarm history data to the Alarm history i 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O A drive standard CF card for GT11 Function to display the cursor by touching an alarm and function to output the 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O oO corresponding comment No to a device Continued to next page App 26 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Item Description Version of GT Version of OS GT GT Soft GT Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Function for detecting alarm even at the fall of bit device with Advanced User 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x Alarm Function to display a cursor by touching Advanced Alarm an alarm and to output the corresponding 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x comment No to a device The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x external control Function for using BMP JPEG data in 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x memory card as parts Settings for BMP JPEG file parts c
242. r occurred during communication Communication timeout a os 1 Confirm the cable omission and PLC status 402 Confirm communication pathway 2 Put COM instruction when A QnA or QCPU is connected and the PLC or modules Hem scanning is long Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated SIO status error a ao when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received 403 Confirm communication pathway i are Confirm the cable omission status of the PLC and the transmission or modules speed of the computer link 1 Station numbers other than master local station are specified at the CC Specified station access is out of Link connection via G4 406 range 2 Accessed PLC CPUs other than QCPU Confirm station no Confirm the station number of the monitor screen data Cannot perform operation The operation which could not be performed during RUN of PLC CPU 410 because of PLC run mode was performed stop the PLC Stop the PLC CPU Memory cassette is write The memory cassette installed in PLC CPU is in the state protected with 411 protected EPROM or E2PROM Check the memory cassette Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU Cannot read write device The key word is set in PLC CPU 412 protected by keyword Cancel the key word Remove key word The file register of QNACPU and the device beyond the outside range of PLC cannot handle as requested 448 buffer me
243. r the access switch is turned on 1 Install a recording medium in the specified drive 535 Cannot open image file 2 Turn the access switch on e The specified file is not found in the card 3 Add the image file or change the image file name to a correct one 7 ee 2 There is an error in the image file data or the image file format is not Image file error or invalid file 536 i i supported aii Change to the correct image file The key code input execution trigger was ON with the non target key code 550 Invalid key code set in the key code storage device Confirm the key code supported by the object where error occurs The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified range 29 i RSCIPS device points t00 large Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range There is no empty area space in D drive s If the alarm log file located in the D drive needs to be backed up copy it to Capacity shortage of user 2 571 the CF card with the utility and then format the D drive memory RAM If the recipe function is used to read devices format the D drive and then read again to create the recipe data 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 6 ey MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION uw 0 x gs oe Zy o gt oo vzs wuts APPENDICES 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection and the cause is not clear in 18 2 L
244. rations Language GOT setup Di splay Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON _ Brightness contrast Setting OK GOT setup Display Language l English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON Brightness contrast Setting OK With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK OK Cancel 11 6 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations Touch the setting items to display the Select Language screen When touching the button of a desired language the language is selected and the screen returns to the Display screen Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched The language display does not change till 5 is carried out 4 If X button is touched without touching OK button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with X button GOT restarts and reflect
245. rd will not be displayed 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder in In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed 3 Name n When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21th character or after are not displayed 4 Path name The path name of the currently displayed drive folder is displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was installed are displayed 7 The size of drive Displays the size in use size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Operation switch Execution switch of each function install upload etc which can be executed on the OS information screen TET _ Remark Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Displayed folders and files Refer to the following for the details of displayed folders and files K7 Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 2 OS Information 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 13 8 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS ale Sea ee AND BATTERY st STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 2 4 Operation of OS
246. reset button of GOT Szo Turning ON the CF card access switch Removing the CF card If GOT does not operate please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center a ZZ LON If GOT does not recover after CoreOS is installed there may be a hardware problem Zkz Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center puk aon 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS Fb Before installing CoreOS pka x5 1 Installation method Sok CoreOS can be installed only using the memory card 229 The installation via USB RS 232 or Ethernet is not available 2 CF card to be used z CF card of 32MB or more is required amp oO 3 BootOS S gt By installing CoreOS BootOS is also installed with its latest version automatically z9 No operation is required to the user x D a O u g k O oO zZ O 59 On z a 3a 1 im je zZ 9 wi ie n O x fo Ea oS lt P Re Og of an 16 5 CoreOS 16 11 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS Installation method of CoreOS Write CoreOS from GT Designer2 to the CF card For details on the operation method of GT Designer2 refer to the following manual Communicate with Memory Card Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS wite Points of caution Install CoreOS to a Memory card lt How to Install gt 1 Tum OFF GOT and insert Core0S installed Memory card into the GOT 2 Tum ON GOT 3 wil take a few minutes to start Core0S in
247. rmation color check The overlaped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed visually in order it is normal For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale d Pattern 4 Shape Check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal If touch the upper right part of the screen returns to Display check screen To Display check 14 12 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 3 Display and operation of drawing check 14 5 Font Check 14 5 1 Font check function The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed on the upper left part of the screen one by one 14 5 2 Display operation of font check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check 3 Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display ca Program data control ERX self check Debug amp self check Display check Debug self check Display check Drawing check Font check Starting font check Touch Font check in the Display check Touch Font check to display the screen describing the font check operation Touch the upper right of the description screen to
248. rror message Action code The number of objects of the screen to be displayed is too large and the system work area cannot be secured 303 SEU MONG ee as large Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen For the Decrease setting points number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 VersionD Screen Design Manual When cycle is ON and when cycle is OFF the number of objects used Set trigger points too large 304 i exceeds 100 Decrease setting points Decrease the number of objects 306 No project data The project data is not downloaded to the built in flash memory Download screen data Download the project data to the built in flash memory The monitor device of the object is not set 307 Monitor device not set f Set the monitor device of the object 308 No comment data The comment file does not exist Download comment Create the comment file and download to GOT 309 Device reading error The error occurred when reading a continuous device Correct device Correct the device 1 Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project 310 Project data does not exist or out data of range 2 Specified base screen window screen is out of the permissible area Specify the existing base screen window screen No of alarm has exceeded upper The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history 311 limit display function has exceeded the maxim
249. rts Q If an error occurs the dialog is displayed at that point notifying the GOT has terminated abnormally and which byte the error occurred and then the GOT restarts If a verification error occurs the RS 232 interface hardware may be faulty 14 7 I O Check 14 19 14 7 3 I O check operation COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 8 System Alarm Display 14 8 1 System alarm display function System alarm display is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT controller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual CF GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM 14 8 2 Displaying the system alarm display Main menu Debug amp self check gt 9 3 Utility Display Communication setting GA GOT setup Time setting amp display ol Program data control Touch System alarm display Touch Debug amp self check System alarm display Debug self check System alarm disp GOT error Reset When touching Reset the system alarm display on the GOT is
250. s GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB CF card GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB Commercially available CF card 2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html Memory card adaptor Sold separately Model name Contents GT05 MEM ADPC Product name CF card to memory card Type II conversion adaptor Memory card adaptor 2 9 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Option function board Sold separately GT11 50FNB 3 Necessity of mounting the option function board may offer depending on the hardware version Refer to the following for detailes lt gt Section 8 3 Option Function Board Product name Contents Option function board Option function board We OVERVIEW Stand Sold separately Product name Contents GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Stand A9GT 50STAND Stand Common to A950GOT Battery Sold separately Zz O lt x ao D Oo m zZ Q oO SYSTEM n Prod
251. s been Comm nigationdriver changed 2 43V O x O FREQROL 500 700 03 01 3 to 30 seconds 1 to 30 seconds Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 19 ee Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 02 02 Supporting connection to CNC 2 18U A QnAQJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 O O O CNC connection 02 02 MELSECNET 10 02 02 CC Link ID 02 02 Communication driver name has been Communication driver 2 43V O x O changed AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 03 01 r toni iii 200K Communication driver upporting connection to servo amplifier i Ee q P MELSERVO J2S M 01 02 O x O Supporting connection to MELSERVO J3 Communication driver 2 18U O x O series MELSERVO J3 J2S M 02 02 Servo amplifier Supporting writing to the E27PROM area in 292 Communication driver connection parameter writing l MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 O x O Supporting the point table setting for MR Communication driver 2 32J O x O J2S CP MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 inane ea 232 Communication driver upporting the test run mode Ee MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 O x O s A sient d F 209K Extended function OS upporting connection to barcode reader m x Bar code reader Barcode 01 02 s connection P Pe F
252. s the setting contents Brightness Contrast Zz Refer to the following for brightness contrast setting 5 Zz Section 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment re gt z 5 Invert colors Ch z GT1150 2 Q xt So ae Sie SUITE 5 Setting item 1 changa if setting item is 95u Language English touched ON cd OFF 11 Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time Q Min O None 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button Screen save back ight OFF is touched Battery alarm display a 25a Brightness contrast Setting zrg Invert Colors OFF ater Ont o0 AON 8 l Z gt 5 With do not push OK button If X button is touched without touching Fig if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialogue mentioned left pRa value will be canceled ic jj als 0K is displayed 80 oO OK button The change contents are Be canceled and the screen is closed 2 OK Cancel Cancel button The display setting screen z is displayed fa man 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup o screens after completing the setting of all items to change with X button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 5 3 D O Oo Zz 59 2y Za Hg oa 8 e 5 5 Sos Eta FoZ 2050F sdo 11 1 Display Settings 11 7 11 1 3 Display setting operations 11 2
253. s up down by one line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls z z 5 A GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 13 2 OS Information 13 12 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file When data is normal Data normal When data is erroneous Data error ox 13 13 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check Touching OK button closes the dialog If the data check fails the target file may be broken Install the target file again For details of installation refer to the following lt gt Chapter 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 3 Project Information z O O z 13 3 1 Function of project information 2 Z The project data files stored in each drive A Built in CF card C Flash memory can be displayed by lists gt In addition the files can be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc Function Contents Reference page z Information display of files and A f 2 fold Displays the kind name data size the creation date and time of the file or folder 13 15 13 16 a olders Zlo Delete Deletes project dat
254. setting operation GOT setup Menu call key Please select keys Pressing time is effective only in case one point With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK cy Touch _ or displayed on the four corners of the setting screen TA The button repeats x gt every time it is pressed Change the part to be set as a key position to 2 When the key position is specified by one point the time to switch to the utility when the key position is kept pressing can be set Touch the time area The keyboard is displayed if the input area is touched Input a setting time from the keyboard Setting contents are defined by touching OK button If button is touched without touching OK button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The utility call key setting screen is displayed After finishing all the settings for items to be changed on the operation screen closing Operation and GOT setup screens with X button restarts GOT and reflects the setting contents 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 17 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation z O 5 Z 5 Ww Ss e ke 5 z O an 50 Z T zk m O5 w 0
255. splay size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format Display character 16 dot standard font 20 characters x 15 lines 12 dot standard font 26 characters x 20 lines Horizontal format i Monochrome black white Display Display color 256 colors section 16 scales 4 Left right 70 degrees Top Left right 55 degrees Top Left right 45 degrees Top Display angle 70 degrees Bottom 50 65 degrees Bottom 70 20 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format Contrast adjustment 16 level adjustment Intensity of LCD 400 cd m 380 cd m 220 cd m only Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h at operating ambient temperature of 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube irreplaceable by the user backlight detection function is Backlight included Backlight screen saving time can be set Approx 54 000 hours or longer The time takes to Approx 75 000 hours or longer The time takes to j reduce to 50 of the reduce to 50 of the backlight luminance at the operating Life backlight luminance at the ambient temperature of 25 C operating ambient Guaranteed 1 year temperature of 25 C Guaranteed 1 year Number of touch keys 300 keys screen Matrix of 15 lines x 20 columns Kev si 7
256. stallation Do not tum OFF or reset GOT during CoreOS installation to avoid faing in restarting Alter completion of installation restart GOT after tuming OFF and removing Memory card Reinstall and download the followings after GOT is restarted Basic OS Communications diver Requited other OS 2 Special data 3 Pioject data _ GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA lt Precaution gt Remove all units connected to extension I F slot before CoreOS installation Boot0S will be installed together with Core0S GOT Type Boot OS Version E Transfer size 16418 ye Memory card ai Empty area size 1546144 kbyte Instal Close Check that the power of GOT main unit is OFF and then mount the CF card to GOT After mounting it turn ON the CF card access switch Turn ON the GOT power CoreOS Install Ver 02 01 00 E After the power is turned on CoreOS pHa ing installation execution screen is orelS 4 Ab Je HBL OTTA i i i Seve te a ASUS automatically displayed after a brief EREI a eel interval TLES 0 OFFS as gat je IRER i eLABa A MORREU FH Bra Do you execute the Core0S installation The internal memory is initialized and return to the state before factory shipment Turn off the memory card access switch before installation If you do not install the Core0S turn off the GOT and remove a CF card 4 After the CF card access switch is
257. start the font check Point P Notes on font check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic amp etc 0 x 0000 to 0 x 04F9 From basic Latin to Krill Hangul 0 x ACOO to 0 x D7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Chinese Characters 0 x 4E00 to 0 x 9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be normally installed Install the Standard monitor OS again 14 5 Font Check 14 13 14 5 1 Font check function UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 14 5 3 Font check operation Touching Font check in the Display check menu displays the screen describing the font check operation Touching the upper right of the screen starts the font check The character data of the installed font stored in the flash memory can be displayed on the screen one by one to confirm the font drawings visually Before execute font check R Upper left touch position Pa Upper right touch position Font data mY w 14 14 14 5 Font Check 14 5 3 Font check operation Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to th
258. switch utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created screen by GT Designer2 Ed Communication setting fi m GOT setup Time setting amp display ca Program data control A Debug amp self check 7 Special function switch Utility Language For the details of the special function switch refer to the following lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Section 6 2 Touch Switch 9 6 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu i Remark Lock the utility display by password When a password is set on the GOT using GT Designer2 a password dialog box is displayed when trying to access the main menu of the utility display The password setting option in GT Designer2 is located in the common menu oD z Q S Zz u gt 2 Main Menu Please input password z a ZQo 9 Szi EEIE ZZ SES 0 AC bel ae why When the password is not matched the following error message is displayed ena N 225 NRI V DARIECT Lira The password is wrong lt 3 oak oto Q g When touching OK the screen returns to the monitor screen amp B A gt 1 Input operation of password 5 1 Input the password after touching 0 to 9 A to F key 2 Define the password by touching key after inputting password g O 3 To correct the input character
259. t 17 4 17 5 3 Q Q Hint Example of alarm output to external device lamp buzzer etc The following describes an example of outputting the battery voltage low signal from a FX series PLC to an external device with system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the Select All button is clicked on the setting screen of GT Designer2 for the system information assignment D36 b12 Battery voltage low System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a battery voltage drop Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 f MOV D36 K4M20 Battery voltage low M32 Output to external device of PLC m n S Activated the output upon battery voltage low detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected For details of system information refer to the following _ GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Section 3 6 System Information Setting 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight For replacement of the backlight contact your
260. t P Re Og oF an 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 5 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility For details of program data control function refer to the following lt Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Program data control is a function to install OS files from the CF card to GOT by the Utility operation Point gt Precautions on executing program data control function When execute program data control function Standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance Thus this function cannot be used for the initial installation of Standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT Install Standard monitor OS by the following two methods 1 Method using GT Designer2 _ GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 2 Installation method when turning the GOT power on lt Section 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on Operation procedure Power OFF the GOT After CF card access LED is off install the CF card in which BootOS Standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT Display the program data control function Program Data 0S information gt G screen Utility on the GOT and install Size Date Time i 02 01 05 13 31 I Bo
261. t touching X button the dialogue box shown on the left displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The brightness contrast adjustment screen is displayed If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 9 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment operation z O 5 Z 5 Ww gt E 5 z O an 50 Z ane Sr z O5 w 020 fa Zz Soo gt qs Qi Ooty aon CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set The items which can be set are described below Function Contents Setting range OFF SHORT LONG Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed lt At factory shipment SHORT gt ON OFF f Whether turn ON OFF buzzer when move window p Window move buzzer volume setting lt At factory shipment can be selected ON gt Security level change screen can be displayed Security setting screen change L gt Section 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed Utility call
262. ta Alarm information DP PROJECT1_ DAPROJECT Size Date Time Contents The drive of which file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is not installed A Built in CF card is not displayed Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder Drive size 2 ne In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name held by the selected drive or folder 3 Name When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21th character and after are not displayed 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file has been created Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive selected by Select drive 8 Operation switch Displays the execution switch of each function Delete copy which can be executed on the alarm information screen 13 25 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Point gt Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the alarm information display screen If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper hierarchy etc and displa
263. tandard monitor OS 02 04 O O O drops Enables the backup restore setting O x x Enables the setting for monitoring local i O x x devices 2 58L Enables setting the drive for collectively i O x x reading comment data i Designation of the channel No used for Clock Setting ao nie 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x adjusting and broadcasting is possible Function for setting any screen for the Standard monitor OS 01 02 Startup Logo 2 09K O O O GOT startup screen Boot OS 01 02 C Handy GOT Setting of the grip switch LED of handy N 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x x O Setting GOT System messages to be displayed on Dialog window GOT can be customized or created by the 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O user App 24 Continued to next page Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Per Version of GT GT GT Soft GT fa Item Description f Version of OS Z Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 z O Standard monitor OS 03 00 z Function to save the GOT operation se i 2 32J Option OS O O x ah performed by the user as a history Ew Operation Log 03 00 Z Z Function for converting multiple files 2 43V O O x The binary format file output can be Operation log converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O X m external control a On Standard monitor OS 03 03 st i f O
264. tched is possible Language 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x Miah Language switching device can be used Switching Device 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O Password can be set for the connection of Password Setting 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x O motion controller and servo amplifier System information of report function and i j 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 x x O print are added System D drive automatic recovery status N f as 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x x O information notification signal is added System information regarding B drive has 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x been added The name Password is changed to oe 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 G O x Security in the system environment Security Enables setting the operator Extended function OS sah 2 58L ee O O x authentication Operator authentication 03 03 In clock management both adjust and 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x O broadcast can be set Data save device of MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor data can be set at GT 2 18U O x x Designer2 Automatic program read at the start of ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 2 43V x x Priority Level Comment can be set Time setting for call key ON until the start GOT Setup up of utility can be set for 1 point 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x pressing Alarm can be set to be displayed in system language switching or battery 2 27D S
265. te 16 scales ONO I ees wo lt wm x PART NAME Screen size type 15 0 ri 2 10 4 8 4 25 77 14 5 ia NwWOa DN Oo Oo GOT 1000 series GT15 GT11 GT10 1 For GT15 that can display 65536 colors refer to following 37 GT15 User s Manual EMC DIRECTIVE 2 Explanation of the option model name GTER S 2 Pee INSTALLATION 90 15 0 80 12 1 75 Common for 10 4 8 4 70 Dedicated for 10 4 60 Dedicated for 8 4 50 Dedicated for 5 7 30 Dedicated for 4 5 20 Dedicated for 3 7 WIRING 15 Dedicated for GT15 11 Dedicated for GT11 10 Dedicated for GT10 09 05 Common for GT15 GT11 01 OPTION 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 2 4 GOT GT11 Models with a built in serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in serial interface GT1155 QSBD GOT 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 GT1150 QLBD scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in serial interface Models with a built in bus interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in Q bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in A bus serial interface 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 c
266. ter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Insert the bus cables for QnA ACPU and motion controller A series into the GOT s bus interface connectors until they click into the place Check for proper insertion to avoid malfunctions TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the
267. terface and the connection cable hardwares are normal To execute I O check the PLC communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designer2 z Refer to the following for the details related to the installation of the PLC communication driver B ow 50 K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Szo Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA aan SEET Point P I O check function Controllers except MITSUBISHI PLC cannot be checked with the use of I O check G function 252 When checking the communication between GOT and controller follow Preparatory nee Procedures for Monitoring in GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual agy L gt GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual 14 7 2 Display operation of I O check 9 z Cf HEA Main menu Debug amp self check Self check Ooz L7 Section 9 3 Utility Display OLH Main Menu Debug amp self check Debug self check Self check Memory check E m Display check Al X g Touch panel check ca f gm 1 0 check D D 7 a Touch I O check X Touch Debug amp self check T 1 e a oO Y I O check 8 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD z Debug self check 1 0 check is 0 Please select check channel 1 RS422 CPU z 0 RS232 59 Self Oo Z gt Zs i oa 8 0 nm O Sos Eda 285 Zov 14 7 I O Check 14 17 14 7 1 I O check function 14 7 3 I O check operation Target confirmation 14 18 Debug self check 1 0 check Please sele
268. th 20m GT09 C300R40603 6T Cable length 30m RS 232 GT09 C30R20601 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C30R20602 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs Sold separately Product name Model name GT09 C30R40501 15P GT09 C100R40501 15P Cable length 3m Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40501 15P GT09 C300R40501 15P Cable length 20m Cable length 30m Description For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C30R40502 6C Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40502 6C Cable length 10m cable GT09 C200R40502 6C Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40502 6C Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C30R40503 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40503 15P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40503 15P GT09 C300R40503 15P Cable length 20m Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20501 9P GT09 C30R20502 15P 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Cable length 3m Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product Sate Model name Description name GT09 C30R40401 7T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40401 7T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to HITACHI intelligent serial
269. this section z Download 5 own loa Property oa lt gt this section 2 Property Data check Data check lt gt this section H z Download i IL this section B Upload n lt gt this section 5 x O Touching X button closes the screen m LU Z O Oo Zz O 50 On 35 3a 8 oc u 408 eiga Io 258 28s Zan 13 3 Project Information 13 16 13 3 4 Operation of project information Delete operation This operation deletes the selected file Touch and select the file to delete Delete project date Screen mentioned left is displayed if Del PROJECTI button is touched Do you want to delete Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified correctly If touch OK button the file is deleted If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled When the deletion completes the dialog box shown left is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Delete is completed 13 17 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Copy operation Z The file in the A drive is copied to another directory of the A drive S Copy to from C drive or D drive is disabled z E Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive install CF card in the PC in which create a 5 Program Data Project information folder for the copy destination pelect drive Set the same character with System A Built in CF card Setting of System Environ
270. ting When FX series PLC is connected Sequence program protection status cancel When FX series PLC is connected Sequence program protection status reactivate When FX series PLC is connected 9 2 Display Setting of opening screen time Setting of screen saving time Setting of screen saving back light ON OFF Switching message language Japanese English Chinese Simplified Korean German Setting of battery alarm display ON OFF Setting of Invert colors ON OFF GOT setup Brightness contrast Liquid crystal intensity setting Liquid crystal contrast setting Operation Setting of buzzer volume Security setting 3 Security level change security password input of each object Utility call key Setting of the menu call key Key sensitivity Key sensitivity setting Key reaction speed Time setting amp display 9 2 Utility Function List Display of key reaction speed Selection of base clock Display current time of clock Set current time of clock Display of battery status Program data control Item OS information Functions overview Installing OS Uploading OS Property display of OS Kind version and date Data check of system file OS Project Information Downloading project file Uploading project file Project file deleting Copying project file
271. ting a power terminal Color transparent 14 CF card interface Interface for installing the CF card to GOT 15 CF card eject button Button for removing the CF card 16 Batter GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history and recipe data y The project data is stored in the built in flash memory 6 a 4 2 Back Panel 4 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 7 10 11 oa Battery cover opened lt d is ic y S sir c P S u Mi ee SJE 0 SO Lt ok 12 a i 5 e al I inan gt Power e anina layout a RS 232 c 3 ae TO D H eee as f Al d q lobo G g E 9 3 8 3 CF card cover opened No Name Specifications 1 Bus interface Compatible GOT GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ For connection to QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Use Compatible GOT GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Use For connection to QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series 2 RS 232 interface For communicating with controller bar code or pers
272. tion Detail setting screen re ae Set communication parameters from this screen Refer to the following for the setting change operation D e Section 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Communication Detail setting MELSEC FX Z Transmission Speed 38400 BPS Communication parameter o9 2S Se ng oa Keywor d 2 oc Regist Delete Clear Protect us 2 Zog Default OK PEIS Ju ZzeS 235 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 9 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions Point P Communication parameter setting using GT Designer2 1 Select System Environment Communication Settings from GT Designer2 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver To change the communication parameter setting after downloading project data change the setting at Communication Detail Setting described in this section For Communication Settings using GT Designer 2 refer to the following manual gt GT Designer 2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Section 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Display items or setting items of communication detail settings depend on the type of communication driver installed in the GOT For the setting contents of each driver refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Se
273. to 9 Key Input the numeric e Enter Key Touching the Enter key completes numeric input and closes the keyboard e Cancel Key Touching the Cancel key cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard e 4 gt Key Moves the cursor left or right if there is an item that can be entered Del Key Del key is used when canceling the input by 1 character e gt key and the key which is not mentioned do not function Enter key is touched numeric input is completed and keyboard is closed 9 10 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING an UTILITY FUNCTION In Communication Setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel communication driver names display and channel numbers are set Moreover in Communication Detail setting the communication interface details are set Communication parameters setting 1 Zz O lt L O Zz O 8 3 LO LZ ite Wu He LU ZN 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 2z Oy Function Contents ZES agi Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name aam Channel no Ch No setting Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Communication para
274. tor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen A Y 4 Scroll one line column BZ l4 bb Scroll window 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Change of setting value z Q iS rA u gt 2 GOT_setup Operat ion X Ee ng Buzzer volume OFF AJ 1UC24 C24 Dat bit BIT Zz Q a 50 ZU Sfandar d 0 ms pan OK Default Setting item Select button Setting item Select button Q Q Touch the select button setting point on the screen f v OK Key It is a key for selecting the setting value Repeats with each touch ON OFF zsz nw OWE 7 D e Numerical Key It is a key for inputting the numerical value It displays the keyboard on the bottom of O68 the screen when touched In the above mentioned screen example there is no setting item which displays the keyboard For the o raem operation of keyboard refer to the next page Etn WEG oak oto Touching Enter confirms the numerical input When the setting range exists it repeats the numerical without displaying keyboard z Exa
275. ttings This section describes the items that can be set using only the utility screen Keyword settings of MELSEC FX On the communication detail setting screen of MELSEC FX registration deletion cancellation or protection of the keyword for FX series PLC can be executed MELSEC FX Communication Detail setting MELSEC FX Transmission Speed 38400 BPS Keyword Regist Delete Clear Protect 10 10 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Regist Keyword is registered D Touching the Regist key pops up a keyboard for keyword input When the keyword is input and the key is touched registration is completed For the keyword 8 digits from 0 to 9 or A to F must be set an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Please input keyword ic ea Registration conelition 2nd M All Protect w z ra a wi Z Zz O i 9 Site ZYE E Eiu Ofn Q Zz LON z599 ate Qo O00 Settings Target PLC a When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered When only keyword is registered woe FEA FX PLC compatible with 2nd ma 2 Registration options can be selected isa keyword lt 2 Registration options cannot be selected Sak FX PLC not compatible with 2nd IZE OL keyword 1 Refer to the manual for the PLC in use for the models that are compatible with the 2nd keyword 2 Registration o
276. turned Core0S Install Ver 02 01 00 E off the installation of CoreOS is started ES Fee eet TLES v bRD EMER EEO pon t push the reset button CorelS4 YA hI OBRPCT Installing CoreQS Phase EE SSS Progress 16 12 16 5 CoreOS 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS When the installation is completed the CoreOS Instal Ver 02 01 00 E dialogue box shown on the left is displayed a f gt oO AE Tee ee ee ee Check that the message is displayed and turn the GOT power OFF S Installation is completed p A Turn OFF GOT and remove CF card When the installation is completed the power LED blinks gt Phase a ER Remove the CF card after turning the Progress power OFF 6 q Ow szo iZ If the power is turned on again the screen sia BROS VAK IVL TS RA is di Please install the Standard 6s shown on the En IS displayga The GOT goes into its factory shipped condition As necessary install each OS Standard a monitor OS communication driver etc or Seg Zz download a project data ae For the installation method of each OS or tole the download method of project data refer BootOS Version 02 01 00 E to the following manual E OS lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic aan ol Operation Data Transfer Manual GEO 8 TRANSFERRING DATA SAP JZE Oxun 16 5 2 When CoreOS cannot be installed Q Zz lt When CoreOS cannot be installed check the fol
277. uct name Contents Battery 4 GT11 50BAT For storing clock data alarm history and recipe data S o 4 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit g N Bus extension connector box sold separately Product name Contents Bus extension Used for QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series bus A9GT QCNB i connector box connection when the cable is longer than 13 2 m lt i lt Bus connector adapter box sold separately Product name Contents Used for QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series bus connection w Bus connector i f gt A7GT CNB when the cable is longer than 13 2 m For changing a large connector z adapter box Mr to a small connector x Q ii Protective sheet Sold separately Product name Model name Contents GT11 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets 2 O GT11 50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets Ee Protective sheet 5 7 protective sheet z GT11 50PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT11 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets USB environmental protection cover Sold separately Product name Model name Contents USB environmental Replacement environmental protection cover for USB interface on g GT11 50UCOV i Z protection cover 5 the GOT main unit front side For complying IP67 z 5 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit Zz O oO 2 2 Component List 2 10 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Drawing software Sold separately Product name Contents SW 1 DS5C GTD2 E GT Des
278. um points 1024 points Delete restored alarm Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory No of sampling has exceeded and Accumulate Average were set in the scatter graph 312 upper limit 1 Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph Delete collected data 2 Set the Operation at frequency over time and initialize and continue in scatter graph 315 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device Correct device Correct the device In indirect specification of comment parts number the data operation Cannot display or input operation 316 i result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed value Review the data operational expression in order not exceeding the range Review expression i in which the device type can be expressed 320 Specified object does not exist or The part file does not exist out of range Create the part file and download to GOT Station No for monitor device is f 321 Check the monitor target station No of the project data wrong 18 3 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Error Error message Action code The monitored device No is set out of the permissible range of the targeted PLC CPU or the data length for a device dedicated to 32 bits is n E set other than 32 bits Dedicated device is out of range o
279. unication driver Downloading the project data with communication settings channel number and communication driver assignment 2 Selectable languages vary depending on the standard fonts that are installed 3 Itis necessary to set the security level with GT Designer2 4 Itis necessary to install the RS 232 connector for test Section 14 7 I O Check 9 2 Utility Function List 9 3 INTERFACE COMMUNICATION SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND Zz o QO ra Uu gt m STATUS DISPLAY DISPLAY SECTION GOT SELF CHECK STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 3 Utility Display To display setting screens for each utility the main menu must displayed first The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited Main Menu 5 5 Communication setting GOT setup Main Menu S 5 s Communication setting GOT setup X 1 Time setting amp display 1 Time setting amp display ca Program data control q ca Program data control A Debug amp self check A Debug amp self check 2 Language Language 1 Main menu The menu items that can be selected from the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item
280. us iri foreign Visual check P S aE Remove clean matter sticking Loose i terminal Retighten screws with Not loose Retighten terminal screws screwdriver screws 4 Connection Proximate status solderless Visual check Proper intervals Correct terminals Loose Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing connectors screws Check the system Replace with new battery alarm error code 500 report on the when the current battery 5 Battery Preventive maintenance has reached the specified Alarm Information screen Section 13 4 Alarm Information life span even if battery voltage is not displayed 17 1 Daily Inspection 17 2 17 3 Cleaning Method Use the GOT always in a clean condition To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent For the display operation of the Clean screen refer to the following lt gt Chapter 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN Clean GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT 1000 MITSUBISHI Point P Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices 17 3 17 3 Cleaning Method 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery
281. version automatically 13 3 1 3 When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installation so that the older version may not be written Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version the version information and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed When installing from the standard CF card the dialog is displayed by the main unit When installing from GT Designer2 via USB or RS 232 the dialog is displayed by the GT Designer2 When install Standard monitor OS communication driver Option OS When Standard monitor OS communication driver or Option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist among all OSs Standard monitor OS communication driver and Option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled When download project data GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the CF card storing the project data and OS beforehand
282. wae Extended function OS upporting connection to 2D code reader PE i Barcode 02 04 O x O Print fi di EEEE 2D Extended function OS rinter connection upporting connection to printer pe I P Printer 02 04 O x x GT15 Standard monitor OS 01 02 Supporting the FA transparent function via USB 2 09K GT11 O x O Standard monitor OS 01 02 Boot OS 01 02 C FA transparent 7 7 MT Developer via USB MR Configurator and FR Configurator are added as 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O compatible software GX Configuration and PX Developer are i f 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x O added as compatible software Multiple GT11 Connection with multiple GT11s 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 x x O connection i Extended function OS External I O Supporting connection to external I O f 2 58L External I O Operation Panel O x x device connection App 20 devices 03 03 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Item Ethernet download Basic comment comment group Added GT Designer2 functions Description Downloading the project data via Ethernet Copying comments in column unit on Basic Comment or Comment Group etc Version of GT Designer2 2 09K 2 09K Version of OS Standard monitor OS 01 02 GT 15 GT Soft GOT1000 x O GT 11 Library workspace Improved library
283. x Deleting alarm log file O x O x Copying alarm log file O x O x G1A CSV conversion Conversion of Alarm information O x x x alarm file from G1A to CSV G1A TXT conversion Conversion of O x x x alarm file from G1A to TEXT Historical graph Historical graph display of alarm file O x x x display Total graph i Total graph display of alarm file O X x x display G1P CSV conversion Conversion of PS O x x x advanced recipe file from G1P to CSV G1P TXT conversion Conversion of er O x x x advanced recipe file from G1P to CSV Advanced recipe Deleting advanced recipe file or folder O x x x information Copying advanced recipe file O x x x Moving advanced recipe file or folder O x x x Changing advanced recipe folder name O x x x Creating a new advanced recipe file or O x x x folder Loading record value x x x Advanced recipe Saving record value O x x x record list Matching record value O x x x Deleting device value O x x x Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Continued to next page Program data control O Applicable x Not Applicatble Not requireds aa Setting items Function GT15 Dra GT11 ate G1L CSV conversion Conversion of logging file from G1L to CSV X G1L TXT conversion Conversion of logging file from G1L to TXT Q as i a Logging Deleting logging file or folder O x x x information A Copying logging file O x x
284. x H135 5 32 x D56 2 21 mm inch Excluding USB environmental protective cover Horizontal format Panel cutting dimensions W153 6 03 x H121 4 77 mm inch Horizontal format Weight 0 7kg Excluding mounting fixtures Compatible software package GT Designer2 Version2 or later 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect 2 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life 3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Not compliant when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment 3 2 Performance Specifications e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Specifications Item GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1150 QLBDA aus STN monochrome black Type TFT color liquid crystal Color liquid crystal eae white liquid crystal Screen size 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240 dots Di
285. y installed Installation of the Boot OS is not necessary unless upgrading the Boot OS version 2 Copying the project data using the CF card Download the project data after installing the Boot OS Standard monitor OS and other OSs Make sure that the version of the Standard monitor OS on the GOT and that of the Standard monitor OS that created the project data match 3 When the OS and project data are on the CF card When GT Designer2 is in use When the 2 point press installation function is used project data will be installed at the completion of the OS installation When installing the system using the utility screen install the OS and download the project data on their respective operation screens 4 The installation cannot be interrupted The followings should not be performed during the installation of BootOS or standard monitor OS The installation may fail and GOT may not operate e Turning OFF the GOT power e Pressing the reset button of GOT e Turning OFF the CF card access switch e Removing the CF card When GOT does not operate due to the failure of the installation follow the procedures mentioned below e When the installation of BootOS is failed Install CoreOS lt gt Section 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS When the installation of standard monitor OS is failed Install BootOS lt Section 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on 16 4 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Usin
286. y the screen again the updated contents are displayed aN Remark Folders and files displayed Ro Refer to the following for the details of folders and files displayed Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Zz O o 5 The display operation of alarm information gt Alarm information screen _ ch If touch a drive of Select drive the Program Data Alarm information information in the first folder of the touched elect drive drive is displayed ue A Built in CF card g B If touch a folder name the information of Su the touched folder is displayed aiz C Flash Memory Seu SRAM amp If touch a folder of the information of D Interna the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed Q 4 If touch A button of the scrollbar the 28 screen scrolls up down by one line azz If touch 2 button the screen scrolls Sai up down by one screen Alarm information Storage file folder display screen Program Data Alarm information If touch a file name the touched file name 8 x L is select invert Era rndName Size Date is selected and inverted ae DIRI n CSV ALARMHST 1K 02 01 05 18 26 Refer to the following for delete copy 55o operations oan Delete ces C this section 13 COPY an lt this section E z gt If touc
287. z pioa lt On Alarm i a ca no fe ecipe e a aon A drive Inserting Removing F 2 3 Z gt FEA a HWN Built in CF card Built in CF card WEA when installed in GOT when installed in PC lt 52 OAE ode otb The data of the Flash Memory Project data etc can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes 3 low a Zz Data type Storage location x BootOS BootOS 5 A Standard monitor OS u Communication driver Flash Memory C drive L Extended function OS Option OS x O W Project data RE 5 Project data Including recipe setting alarm conditions time action and GOT setup Flash Memory C drive u LU Alarm data Alarm log file 2 Internal SRAM D drive g Recipe data 4 The project data can be started only from the flash memory C drive It cannot be started from the built in CF card A drive we On On A zZz Point gt Folder and file in memory card 45 a i oa Multiple folders and files will be created when OS or project data is transferred to the memory card N Do not delete or edit these folders and files since the GOT uses them z Z i O If the folders or files are deleted or edited the GOT will not function normally eB 5 S98 EA EES z52 BS Zan 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 2 13 1 2 Data type and storage location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and Standard monitor OS When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS

GT11 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents